Mercedes-Benz GLC 2017 Operator's Manual PDF

1 of 374
1 of 374

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz GLC 2017 Operator's Manual PDF

GLC Operator's Manual

Your Operator's Manual

Digital form inside the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").

Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi- media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the Internet You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

Digital form as an App TheMercedes-BenzGuidesApp is available for free on theAppleApp store orGoogle Play.

Apple iOS Android

Order no. P253 0317 13 Part no. 253 584 29 02 Edition B 2017

2535842902^ 2535842902

GL CO

pe rat

or' sM

an ua l

Publication details Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with- out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AG Mercedesstra e 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany

Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are reg- istered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink is a registered trademark of John- son Controls. RiPod and iTunes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RBurmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. RMicrosoft and Windows media are regis- tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation. RGracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis- tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol- lowing symbols:

G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with infor- mation on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan- gers that could lead to damage to your vehi- cle.

i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be fol- lowed.

X Several of these symbols in succession indicate an

instruction with several steps.

(Y page)

This symbol tells you where you can find more informa- tion about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.

Display This text indicates a mes- sage on the multifunction display/multimedia display.

As at 08.04.2016

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- cle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Benz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RDigital Operator's Manual RPrinted Operator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicle The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains infor- mative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to this manual and the afore- mentioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multi- media system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the Internet TheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro- vides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys- tem. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options. Digital form as an App Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle andmultimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tab- lets.

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

2535842902 2535842902^

Index ....................................................... 4

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 26 Introduction ........................................... 26 Operation ............................................... 26

Introduction ......................................... 27 Protecting the environment ................... 27 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 27 Operator's Manual ................................. 28 Service and vehicle operation ................ 28 Operating safety .................................... 30 QR codes for the rescue card ................ 32 Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 32 Information on copyright ....................... 34

At a glance ........................................... 35 Cockpit .................................................. 35 Instrument cluster ................................. 36 Multifunction steering wheel ................. 37 Center console ...................................... 38 Overhead control panel ......................... 41 Door control panel ................................. 42

Safety ................................................... 43 Panic alarm ............................................ 43 Occupant safety .................................... 43 Children in the vehicle ........................... 59 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 64 Driving safety systems ........................... 64 Protection against theft ......................... 76

Opening and closing ........................... 77 SmartKey ............................................... 77 Doors ..................................................... 83 Cargo compartment ............................... 84 Side windows ......................................... 90 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ...................................................... 93

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 98 Correct driver's seat position ................ 98 Seats ..................................................... 98 Steering wheel ..................................... 104

Mirrors ................................................. 106 Memory function ................................. 109

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 111 Exterior lighting ................................... 111 Interior lighting .................................... 115 Replacing bulbs ................................... 115 Windshield wipers ................................ 119

Climate control ................................. 123 Overview of climate control systems ... 123 Operating the climate control sys- tems .................................................... 124 Air vents .............................................. 129

Driving and parking .......................... 131 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 131 Driving ................................................. 131 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .................... 139 Automatic transmission ....................... 141 Refueling ............................................. 148 Parking ................................................ 154 Driving tips .......................................... 157 Driving systems ................................... 162 Towing a trailer .................................... 202

On-board computer and displays .... 208 Important safety notes ........................ 208 Displays and operation ........................ 208 Menus and submenus ......................... 212 Display messages ................................ 227 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................... 256

Multimedia system ........................... 268 General notes ...................................... 268 Important safety notes ........................ 268 Function restrictions ............................ 268 Operating system ................................ 269

Stowage and features ...................... 278 Stowage areas ..................................... 278 Features .............................................. 290

2 Contents

Maintenance and care ...................... 306 Engine compartment ........................... 306 ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 310 Care ..................................................... 311

Breakdown assistance ..................... 319 Where will I find...? .............................. 319 Flat tire ................................................ 321 Battery (vehicle) .................................. 325 Jump-starting ....................................... 328 Towing and tow-starting ...................... 330 Fuses ................................................... 333

Wheels and tires ............................... 336 Important safety notes ........................ 336 Operation ............................................ 336 Winter operation .................................. 338 Tire pressure ....................................... 339 Loading the vehicle .............................. 346 All about wheels and tires ................... 349 Changing a wheel ................................ 356 Wheel/tire combination ...................... 360

Technical data ................................... 362 Information regarding technical data ... 362 Vehicle electronics .............................. 362 Identification plates ............................. 363 Service products and filling capaci- ties ...................................................... 364 Vehicle data ......................................... 370 Trailer tow hitch ................................... 371

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac- tion System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 175 12 V socket

see Socket (12 V) 115 V socket ...................................... 294 360 camera

Cleaning ......................................... 316 Display in the multimedia system .. 188 Function/notes ............................. 187

A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 228 Function/notes ................................ 65 Warning lamp ................................. 259

Accident Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 58

Activating media mode General notes ................................ 276

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 125 Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on- board computer) ............................ 221 Display message ............................ 246 Function/notes ............................. 197

Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (on- board computer) ............................ 221 Display message ............................ 245 Function/information .................... 200

Active light function Display message ............................ 239

Active Parking Assist Canceling ....................................... 182 Detecting parking spaces .............. 179 Exiting a parking space .................. 181 Function/notes ............................. 178 Important safety notes .................. 178 Parking .......................................... 180

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 73

Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 69

Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 174

Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 173 Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 240 Function/notes ............................. 113 Switching on/off ........................... 114

Additional speedometer ................... 223 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 368 Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Adjusting the volume Multimedia system ........................ 269

Air bags Deployment ..................................... 55 Display message ............................ 237 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 49 Important safety notes .................... 48 Introduction ..................................... 48 Knee bag .......................................... 50 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 51 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 44 Side impact air bag .......................... 50 Window curtain air bag .................... 50

AIR BODY CONTROL Display message ............................ 244 Function/notes ............................. 172 Lowering the rear of the vehicle .... 174 Raising the rear of the vehicle ....... 174 Setting the normal vehicle level ..... 173 Setting the raised vehicle level ...... 173

Air filter (display message) .............. 243 Air suspension

see AIR BODY CONTROL Air vents

Important safety notes .................. 129 Rear ............................................... 130 Setting ........................................... 129 Setting the center air vents ........... 130 Setting the side air vents ............... 130

Air-conditioning system see Climate control

4 Index

Airbag Warning lamp ................................. 262

Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 76 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 76

Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMG Performance Seat .......................... 102

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 224 Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Armrest

Stowage compartment .................. 279 Ashtray ............................................... 292 Assistance display (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 219 Assistance menu (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 220 ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 310 Driving abroad ............................... 311 Hiding a service message .............. 310 Resetting the service interval dis- play ................................................ 311 Service message ............................ 310 Special service requirements ......... 311

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 76 Function ........................................... 76 Switching off the alarm .................... 76

ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 221 Display message ............................ 244 Displaying level .............................. 192 Function/notes ............................. 191

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lights Display message ............................ 239 see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 311

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/ stop function) .................................... 137 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 136 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 111 Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 143 Changing gear ............................... 143 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 141 Display message ............................ 252 Double-clutch function .................. 143 Drive program ................................ 144 Drive program display .................... 142 Driving tips .................................... 143 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 139 Emergency running mode .............. 148 Engaging drive position .................. 142 Engaging neutral ............................ 142 Engaging park position automati- cally ............................................... 141 Engaging reverse gear ................... 142 Engaging the park position ............ 141 Gearshift recommendation ............ 147 Gliding mode ................................. 144 Kickdown ....................................... 144 Manual shifting .............................. 145 Oil temperature (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 224 Overview ........................................ 141 Permanent setting ......................... 146 Problem (malfunction) ................... 148 Pulling away ................................... 135 Starting the engine ........................ 134 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 145 Trailer towing ................................. 144 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 142 Transmission positions .................. 143

Automatic transmission emer- gency mode ....................................... 148 Axle load, permissible (trailer tow- ing) ...................................................... 371

B Back button ....................................... 269 Backup lamp

Display message ............................ 239

Index 5

Replacing bulbs ............................. 118 Bag hook ............................................ 284 Ball coupling

Installing ........................................ 204 Removing ....................................... 206

BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 65 BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist PLUS with Cross- Traffic Assist)

Function/notes ................................ 66 Important safety notes .................... 66

Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 80 Important safety notes .................... 80 Replacing ......................................... 80

Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 327 Display message ............................ 241 Important safety notes .................. 325 Jump starting ................................. 328

Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (on- board computer) ............................ 221 Display message ............................ 246 Notes/function .............................. 193 see Active Blind Spot Assist

Blootooth Connecting a different mobile phone ............................................ 276

BlueTEC see DEF

Bluetooth Searching for a mobile phone ........ 275 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268 Telephony ...................................... 275

Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid Display message ............................ 233 Notes ............................................. 368

Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution)

Brake linings Display message ............................ 233

Brakes ABS .................................................. 65 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 69 BAS .................................................. 65 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 66 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 368 Display message ............................ 228 EBD .................................................. 73 Hill start assist ............................... 136 HOLD function ............................... 171 Important safety notes .................. 159 Maintenance .................................. 160 Parking brake ................................ 155 Riding tips ...................................... 159 Warning lamp ................................. 258

Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 319 see Flat tire see Towing away

Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 35 Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 209

C California

Important notice for retail cus- tomers and lessees .......................... 28

Calling up a malfunction see Display messages

Calling up the climate control bar Multimedia system ........................ 272

Calling up the climate control menu

Multimedia system ........................ 272 Camera

see 360 camera see Rear view camera

Car see Vehicle

Care 360 camera ................................. 316 Car wash ........................................ 311 Carpets .......................................... 318 Display ........................................... 316 Exhaust pipe .................................. 316 Exterior lights ................................ 315

6 Index

General notes ................................ 311 Interior ........................................... 316 Matte finish ................................... 314 Paint .............................................. 313 Plastic trim .................................... 317 Power washer ................................ 313 Rear view camera .......................... 316 Roof lining ...................................... 318 Seat belt ........................................ 318 Seat cover ..................................... 317 Selector lever ................................ 317 Sensors ......................................... 315 Side running board ........................ 315 Steering wheel ............................... 317 Trim pieces .................................... 317 Washing by hand ........................... 312 Wheels ........................................... 314 Windows ........................................ 314 Wiper blades .................................. 315 Wooden trim .................................. 317

Cargo compartment Opening/closing (from outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 87 Plug-in module (telescopic rods) .... 287

Cargo compartment cover Important safety notes .................. 285 Notes/how to use ......................... 285

Cargo compartment enlargement ... 281 Cargo compartment floor

Important safety notes .................. 288 Opening/closing ............................ 288 Stowage well (under) ..................... 288

Cargo compartment plug-in mod- ule (telescope bars) .......................... 287 Cargo net

Attaching ....................................... 286 Important safety information ......... 285

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 284 CD

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

CD player (on-board computer) ........ 217 Center console

Lower section .................................. 40 Upper section .................................. 38

Central locking Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 77

Change of address .............................. 29 Change of ownership .......................... 29 Changing the media source ............. 216 Charge-air pressure (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles) .................................................... 224 Child

Restraint system .............................. 60 Child seat

Forward-facing restraint system ...... 63 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 61 On the front-passenger seat ............ 62 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 62 Top Tether ....................................... 61

Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 63 Rear doors ....................................... 64

Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 59

Children in the vehicle Important safety notes .................... 59

Cigarette lighter ................................ 292 Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 315 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 316

Climate control Control panel for dual-zone auto- matic climate control ..................... 123 Controlling automatically ............... 125 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 125 Cooling with air dehumidification (multimedia system) ...................... 273 Defrosting the windows ................. 127 Defrosting the windshield .............. 126 ECO start/stop function ................ 124 General notes ................................ 123 Indicator lamp ................................ 125 Ionization ....................................... 129 Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 273 Notes on using the automatic cli- mate control .................................. 124 Overview ........................................ 272 Overview of systems ...................... 123 Perfume atomizer .......................... 128 Perfume atomizer (multimedia system) .......................................... 272

Index 7

Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 127 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 125 Refrigerant ..................................... 369 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 370 Setting the air distribution ............. 126 Setting the air vents ...................... 129 Setting the airflow ......................... 126 Setting the climate mode ............... 126 Setting the climate mode (multi- media system) ............................... 272 Setting the temperature ................ 126 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 128 Switching on/off ........................... 124 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 127 Switching the synchronization function on and off ........................ 126 Synchronization function (multi- media system) ............................... 273

Climate control settings Multimedia system ........................ 272

Climate control system Climate control .............................. 124

Coat hooks ......................................... 287 Cockpit

Overview .......................................... 35 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 220 Display message ............................ 233 Operation/notes .............................. 67

COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 316

Combination switch .......................... 112 Connecting a USB device

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 213 Controller ........................................... 269 Controlling speed

see DISTRONIC PLUS Convenience closing feature .............. 91 Convenience opening feature ............ 91

Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 309 Display message ............................ 240 Filling capacity ............................... 369 Important safety notes .................. 368 Temperature display in the instru- ment cluster .................................. 209 Warning lamp ................................. 263

Cooling see Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 34 Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 239 Function/notes ............................. 113

Crosswind Assist ................................. 73 Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 162 Deactivating ................................... 163 Display message ............................ 248 Driving system ............................... 162 Function/notes ............................. 162 General notes ................................ 162 Important safety notes .................. 162 Setting a speed .............................. 163 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 163 Storing the current speed or call- ing up the last stored speed .......... 163

Cup holder Center console .............................. 290 Important safety notes .................. 290 Rear compartment ......................... 290

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 31 Customer Relations Department ....... 31

D Data

see Technical data Data carrier

Selecting ........................................ 217 Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 239 Function/notes ............................. 111 Switching on/off (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 223

8 Index

DEF Adding ........................................... 151 Display message ............................ 243 Displaying level and range ............. 219 Filling capacity ............................... 367 Important safety notes .................. 367 Low outside temperatures ............. 367 Purity ............................................. 367

DEF Additives ........................................ 367

Diagnostics connection ...................... 31 Diesel .................................................. 366 Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 26 Introduction ..................................... 26

Digital speedometer ......................... 213 DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 141 Display

see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps

Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 310 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 227 Driving systems ............................. 244 Engine ............................................ 240 General notes ................................ 227 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 227 Introduction ................................... 227 Lights ............................................. 239 Safety systems .............................. 228 SmartKey ....................................... 255 Tires ............................................... 250 Vehicle ........................................... 252

Distance recorder ............................. 212 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 265 Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 68 Distance warning system

see COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

DISTRONIC PLUS Activating ....................................... 165 Activation conditions ..................... 165 Cruise control lever ....................... 165 Deactivating ................................... 169 Display message ............................ 247

Displays in the instrument cluster .. 168 Driving tips .................................... 169 Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 166 Function/notes ............................. 164 Important safety notes .................. 164 Setting a speed .............................. 167 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 167 Stopping ........................................ 167 with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............................................... 169

Doors Automatic locking (switch) ............... 84 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 77 Control panel ................................... 42 Display message ............................ 254 Emergency locking ........................... 84 Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 Important safety notes .................... 83 Opening (from inside) ...................... 83

Drinking and driving ......................... 157 Drive program

Automatic transmission ................. 144 SETUP (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 225

Drive programs Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 142 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 139

Driver's door see Doors

Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 311

Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 197 Driving on flooded roads .................. 161 Driving safety system

Crosswind Assist ............................. 73 Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 65 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 73 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 69 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 65 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 66 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 67 Distance warning function ............... 68

Index 9

EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) ............................................. 73 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ............................................... 70 Important safety information ........... 65 Overview .......................................... 64 PRE-SAFE Brake ............................. 73 STEER CONTROL ............................. 75

Driving system AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 172 AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 174

Driving systems 360camera .................................. 187 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 197 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 200 Active Parking Assist ..................... 178 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 191 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 193 Cruise control ................................ 162 Display message ............................ 244 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 164 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 169 Driving Assistance Plus package ... 197 HOLD function ............................... 171 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 195 Lane Tracking package .................. 193 PARKTRONIC ................................. 175 Rear view camera .......................... 182 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 192

Driving tips Automatic transmission ................. 143 Brakes ........................................... 159 Break-in period .............................. 131 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 169 Downhill gradient ........................... 159 Drinking and driving ....................... 157 Driving in winter ............................. 161 Driving on flooded roads ................ 161 Driving on wet roads ...................... 161 Exhaust check ............................... 158 Fuel ................................................ 157 General .......................................... 157 Hydroplaning ................................. 161 Icy road surfaces ........................... 161 Important safety notes .................. 131

Limited braking efficiency on sal- ted roads ....................................... 160 Snow chains .................................. 338 Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 160 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... 131 Towing a trailer .............................. 203 Wet road surface ........................... 160

DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 217 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

DYNAMIC SELECT switch Automatic transmission ................. 139 Climate control (3-zone automatic climate control) ............................. 124

E EASY-ENTRY feature

Function/notes ............................. 105 EASY-EXIT feature

Function/notes ............................. 105 EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution)

Display message ............................ 230 Function/notes ................................ 73

ECO display Function/notes ............................. 158 On-board computer ....................... 213

ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 137 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 136 Deactivating/activating ................. 137 General information ....................... 136 Important safety notes .................. 136 Introduction ................................... 136

Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 58

Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 84 Vehicle ............................................. 84

Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 55

Emergency unlocking Tailgate ............................................ 89

10 Index

Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 28

Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 263 Display message ............................ 240 ECO start/stop function ................ 136 Engine number ............................... 364 Irregular running ............................ 138 Jump-starting ................................. 328 Starting (important safety notes) ... 133 Starting problems .......................... 138 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 134 Starting via smartphone ................ 134 Starting with the Start/Stop but- ton ................................................. 134 Switching off .................................. 155 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 333

Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 138

Engine oil Adding ........................................... 308 Additives ........................................ 368 Checking the oil level ..................... 307 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 308 Display message ............................ 242 Filling capacity ............................... 368 General notes ................................ 367 Notes about oil grades ................... 367 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 307 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 224

Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 225 Characteristics ................................. 70 Crosswind Assist ............................. 73 Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 71 Deactivating/activating (notes, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...... 70 Deactivating/activating (on- board computer, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 220

Display message ............................ 228 Function/notes ................................ 70 General notes .................................. 70 Important safety information ........... 70 Trailer stabilization ........................... 73 Warning lamp ................................. 259

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ...................................................... 70 Exhaust

see Exhaust pipe Exhaust check ................................... 158 Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 316 Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 315 Setting options .............................. 111 see Lights

Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... 107 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 108 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 107 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 107 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 108 Setting ........................................... 107 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 109 Storing the parking position .......... 108

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 279

F Favorites

Overview ........................................ 271 Features ............................................. 290 Filler cap

see Refueling Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... 356 MOExtended tires .......................... 321 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 321 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 322

Floormats ........................................... 305 Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 362 Two-way radio ................................ 362

Front wheel arch Removing/installing the cover ....... 117

Index 11

Front wheel arch cover Installing/removing ....................... 117

Fuel Additives ........................................ 366 Consumption statistics .................. 213 Displaying the current consump- tion ................................................ 213 Displaying the range ...................... 213 Driving tips .................................... 157 E10 ................................................ 365 Fuel gauge ....................................... 36 Gasoline ......................................... 365 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 365 Important safety notes .................. 365 Low outside temperatures ............. 367 Problem (malfunction) ................... 151 Quality (diesel) ............................... 366 Refueling ........................................ 148 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 365

Fuel filler flap Closing ........................................... 150

Fuel filter (display message) ............ 243 Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 213

Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 365 Problem (malfunction) ................... 151

Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 334 Before changing ............................. 333 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 334 Fuse box in the cargo compart- ment .............................................. 334 Fuse box in the engine compart- ment .............................................. 334 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 334 Important safety notes .................. 333

G G-Meter (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 224 Garage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 305 General notes ................................ 302 Important safety notes .................. 302

Opening/closing the garage door .. 304 Problems when programming ........ 304 Programming (button in the rear- view mirror) ................................... 303 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 303

Gasoline ............................................. 365 Gear indicator (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 224 Genuine parts ...................................... 27 Glove box ........................................... 279 Google Local Search

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

H HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 87 Handwriting recognition

Switching text reader function on/off ............................................ 271 Touchpad ....................................... 270

Hazard warning lamps ...................... 113 Head restraints

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 101 Adjusting the fore-and-aft posi- tion manually ................................. 101 General notes ................................ 101 Important safety notes .................. 100 Installing/removing (rear) .............. 102

Head-up display Adjusting the brightness ................ 222 Displays and operating .................. 211 Function/notes ............................. 211 Important safety notes .................. 211 Selecting displays .......................... 222 Setting the position ....................... 222 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 109

Headlamps Display message ............................ 239 Fogging up ..................................... 114 see Automatic headlamp mode

Heating see Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 112

12 Index

High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 113 Display message ............................ 239 Replacing bulbs ............................. 117 Switching on/off ........................... 112

Hill start assist .................................. 136 HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 172 Activation conditions ..................... 172 Deactivating ................................... 172 Display message ............................ 247 Function/notes ............................. 171 General notes ................................ 171

Home address see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Hood Closing ........................................... 307 Display message ............................ 254 Important safety notes .................. 306 Opening ......................................... 306

Horn ...................................................... 35 HUD

see Head-up display Hydroplaning ..................................... 161

I Ignition lock

see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 76 Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 265

Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps

Indicators see Turn signals

Insect protection on the radiator .... 307 Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 36 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 208 Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 115 Control ........................................... 115 Overview ........................................ 115 Reading lamp ................................. 115

iPod see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

J Jack

Using ............................................. 357 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 328

K Key positions

SmartKey ....................................... 132 Start/Stop button .......................... 133

KEYLESS-GO Activating ......................................... 78 Convenience closing feature ............ 92 Deactivation ..................................... 78 Locking ............................................ 78 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 133 Start function ................................... 79 Unlocking ......................................... 78

Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 144 Manual gearshifting ....................... 147

Knee bag .............................................. 50

L Lamps

see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 196 Activating/deactivating (on- board computer) ............................ 221 Display message ............................ 245 Function/information .................... 195 see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Tracking package ..................... 193 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 225 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 61 Level control

Display message ............................ 245 see AIR BODY CONTROL

License plate lamp (display mes- sage) ................................................... 239

Index 13

Light function, active Display message ............................ 239

Light switch Operation ....................................... 111

Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 113 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 111 Cornering light function ................. 113 Fogged up headlamps .................... 114 General notes ................................ 111 Hazard warning lamps ................... 113 High beam flasher .......................... 112 High-beam headlamps ................... 112 Light switch ................................... 111 Low-beam headlamps .................... 112 Parking lamps ................................ 112 Rear fog lamp ................................ 112 Setting exterior lighting ................. 111 Standing lamps .............................. 112 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board com- puter) ............................................. 223 Turn signals ................................... 112 see Interior lighting

Loading guidelines ............................ 278 Locking

see Central locking Locking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 84 Emergency locking ........................... 84 From inside (central locking but- ton) .................................................. 83

Locking centrally see Central locking

Low-beam headlamps Display message ............................ 239 Replacing bulbs ............................. 116 Switching on/off ........................... 112

Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- port ................................................ 102

M M+S tires ............................................ 338 Malfunction message

see Display messages

Matte finish (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 314 mbrace

Call priority .................................... 298 Display message ............................ 233 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 299 Downloading routes ....................... 301 Emergency call .............................. 296 General notes ................................ 295 Geo fencing ................................... 302 Info call button .............................. 298 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 300 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 300 Remote vehicle locking .................. 300 Roadside assistance button ........... 297 Search & Send ............................... 299 Self-test ......................................... 296 Speed alert .................................... 301 System .......................................... 295 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 302 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 300

Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 79 General notes .................................. 79 Inserting .......................................... 79 Locking vehicle ................................ 84 Removing ......................................... 79 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 84

Media Interface see Digital Operator's Manual

Memory card (audio) ......................... 217 Memory function

Seats, steering wheel, exterior mirrors ........................................... 109

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360camera .................................. 187 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 197 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 200 Active Parking Assist ..................... 178 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 191 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 193 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 164 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 169 General notes ................................ 162 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 195 PARKTRONIC ................................. 175

14 Index

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) ............................... 57 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58 Rear view camera .......................... 182 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 192

Message memory (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 227 Messages

see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps

Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 315

Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth inter- face) .............................................. 275 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 276 Frequencies ................................... 362 Installation ..................................... 362 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 218 Transmission output (maximum) .... 362

Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 79 MOExtended tires .............................. 321 Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 360 Mounting a new wheel ................... 359 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 357 Raising the vehicle ......................... 357 Removing a wheel .......................... 359 Securing the vehicle against roll- ing away ........................................ 357

MP3 Operation ....................................... 217 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 210

Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 209 Overview .......................................... 37

Multimedia system Switching on and off ...................... 269

Music files see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

N Navigation

Displaying (on-board computer) ..... 214 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 214 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- cle ....................................................... 131

O Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 51 Faults ............................................... 54 Operation ......................................... 51 System self-test ............................... 53

Occupant safety Air bags ........................................... 48 Automaticmeasures after an acci- dent ................................................. 58 Children in the vehicle ..................... 59 Important safety notes .................... 43 Introduction to the restraint sys- tem .................................................. 43 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 51 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 44 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 64 PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- pant protection) ............................... 57 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58 Restraint system warning lamp ........ 44 Seat belt .......................................... 44

OCS Conditions ....................................... 51 Faults ............................................... 54 Operation ......................................... 51 System self-test ............................... 53

Odometer ........................................... 212

Index 15

Oil see Engine oil

On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 224 Assistance graphic menu ............... 219 Assistance menu ........................... 220 Display messages .......................... 227 Displaying a service message ........ 310 Displays and operation .................. 208 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 168 Factory settings ............................. 223 G-Meter ......................................... 224 Head-up display ............................. 211 Head-up display menu ................... 222 Important safety notes .................. 208 Instrument cluster menu ............... 223 Lights menu ................................... 223 Media menu ................................... 216 Menu overview .............................. 212 Message memory .......................... 227 Navigation menu ............................ 214 RACETIMER ................................... 225 Radio menu ................................... 216 Service menu ................................. 219 Settings menu ............................... 220 Standard display ............................ 212 Telephone menu ............................ 218 Trip menu ...................................... 212 Video DVD operation ..................... 217

Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 118 Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 30 Important safety notes .................... 30

Operating system see On-board computer

Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 26

Operator's Manual Overview .......................................... 28 Vehicle equipment ........................... 28

Outside temperature display ........... 209 Overhead control panel ...................... 41 Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 64

P Paddle shifters

see Steering wheel paddle shifters Paint code number ............................ 363 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 313 Panic alarm .......................................... 43 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel

Important safety notes .................... 93 Operating ......................................... 94 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96 Rain closing feature ......................... 95 Reversing feature ............................. 94

Panoramic roof Operating the roller sunblinds .......... 95

Parcel net ........................................... 286 Parking

Important safety notes .................. 154 Parking brake ................................ 155 Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side ................................................ 108 Rear view camera .......................... 182 Switching off the engine ................ 155 see PARKTRONIC

Parking aid see 360 camera see Active Parking Assist see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera

Parking Assist Display message ............................ 246

Parking brake Applying automatically ................... 156 Applying or releasing manually ...... 156 Display message ............................ 230 Electric parking brake .................... 155 Emergency braking ........................ 157 General notes ................................ 155 Releasing automatically ................. 156 Warning lamp ................................. 262

Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 112

PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 177 Driving system ............................... 175

16 Index

Function/notes ............................. 175 Important safety notes .................. 175 Problem (malfunction) ................... 178 Range of the sensors ..................... 176 Warning display ............................. 177

PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 237 Indicator lamps ................................ 44 Problems (malfunction) .................. 237

Perfume atomizer Operating ....................................... 128 Problem (malfunction) ................... 129 Setting the perfume intensity (multimedia system) ...................... 272 Vial ................................................ 128

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 64 Phone book

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 317 Power washers .................................. 313 Power windows

see Side windows PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection)

Display message ............................ 234 Operation ......................................... 57

PRE-SAFE Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 221 Display message ............................ 234 Function/notes ................................ 73 Important safety notes .................... 74 Warning lamp ................................. 265

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS)

Operation ......................................... 58 Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 Immobilizer ...................................... 76

Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 27

Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 135 General notes ................................ 135 Hill start assist ............................... 136 Trailer ............................................ 135

Q QR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 32

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31 Quick access for audio and tele- phone

Changing the station/music track .............................................. 271

R RACE TIMER (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 225 Radar sensor system

Display message ............................ 235 Radiator cover ................................... 307 Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 216 Radio mode

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Radio-wave reception/transmis- sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 30 Rain closing feature (panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 95 Reading lamp ..................................... 115 Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 130 Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 239 Switching on/off ........................... 112

Rear seat Adjusting the angle of the backr- ests ................................................ 283

Rear seat backrest Display message ............................ 254

Rear seats Display message ............................ 254

Rear view camera "Reverse parking" function ............ 184 Cleaning instructions ..................... 316 Coupling up a trailer function ........ 186 Display in the multimedia system .. 183 General notes ................................ 182

Index 17

Object detection (function/ notes) ............................................ 186 Switching on/off ........................... 183 Wide-angle function ....................... 186

Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 127 Switching on/off ........................... 127

Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade .............. 121 Switching on/off ........................... 120

Rear-view mirror Dipping (automatic) ....................... 108

Recuperation display ........................ 213 Reflective safety jacket .................... 319 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem)

Important safety notes .................. 369 Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 36 Important safety notes .................. 148 Refueling process .......................... 149 see Fuel

Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 302 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 303

Replacing bulbs Backup lamp .................................. 118 High-beam headlamps ................... 117 Important safety notes .................. 115 Installing/removing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 117 Low-beam headlamps .................... 116 Opening/closing side trim panels .. 118 Overview of bulb types .................. 116 Replacing front bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) ............... 116 Turn signals (front) ......................... 117

Reporting safety defects .................... 32 Rescue card ......................................... 32 Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 242 Warning lamp ................................. 263

Restraint system Display message ............................ 235 Introduction ..................................... 43

Warning lamp ................................. 262 Warning lamp (function) ................... 44

Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 94 Roller sunblinds ............................... 95 Side windows ................................... 90 Tailgate ............................................ 85

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29 Roller sunblind

Operating ......................................... 96 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel ..................................... 95 Rear side windows ......................... 291 Resetting ......................................... 96

Roof carrier ........................................ 289 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 318 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 370 Route guidance

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Route guidance active ...................... 214

S Safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 59 see Occupant safety see Operating safety

SD card Inserting/removing ........................ 276 Selecting ........................................ 217

SD memory card see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Seat Correct driver's seat position ........... 98

Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and front- passenger seat belt ......................... 47 Adjusting the height ......................... 47 center rear-compartment seat ......... 47 Cleaning ......................................... 318 Correct usage .................................. 46 Fastening ......................................... 47

18 Index

Important safety guidelines ............. 45 Introduction ..................................... 44 Releasing ......................................... 47 Warning lamp ................................. 256 Warning lamp (function) ................... 47

Seats Adjusting (AMG Performance Seat) .............................................. 102 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- port ................................................ 102 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 100 Calling up a stored setting (mem- ory function) .................................. 110 Cleaning the cover ......................... 317 Folding the backrest (rear com- partment) forwards/back .............. 281 Important safety notes .................... 98 Seat heating .................................. 102 Seat heating problem .................... 104 Seat ventilation .............................. 103 Seat ventilation problem ................ 104 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 109

Securing a load see Securing cargo

Securing cargo .................................. 284 Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 317 see Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 315 Service menu (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 219 Service message

see ASSYST PLUS Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 368 Coolant (engine) ............................ 368 DEF special additives ..................... 367 Engine oil ....................................... 367 Fuel ................................................ 364 Important safety notes .................. 364 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- tem) ............................................... 369 Washer fluid ................................... 369

Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 223 On-board computer ....................... 220

SETUP (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 225 Side impact air bag ............................. 50 Side marker lamp (display mes- sage) ................................................... 239 Side running board

Cleaning ......................................... 315 Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 314 Convenience closing feature ............ 91 Convenience opening feature .......... 91 Important safety information ........... 90 Opening/closing .............................. 90 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93 Resetting ......................................... 92 Reversing feature ............................. 90

SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Ski and snowboard bag .................... 280 Sliding sunroof

Important safety notes .................... 93 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 96 see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 80 Changing the programming ............. 79 Checking the battery ....................... 80 Convenience closing feature ............ 92 Convenience opening feature .......... 91 Display message ............................ 255 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 77 Important safety notes .................... 77 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 79 Loss ................................................. 81 Mechanical key ................................ 79 Overview .......................................... 77 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 132

Index 19

Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81 Starting the engine ........................ 134

Smartphone Starting the engine ........................ 134

SMS see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Snow chains ...................................... 338 Socket (12 V)

Cargo compartment ....................... 293 Center console .............................. 293 General notes ................................ 293 Rear compartment ......................... 293

Sound Switching on/off ........................... 269

Special seat belt retractor .................. 59 Specialist workshop ............................ 31 Speed, controlling

see Cruise control Speedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi- tional speedometer ........................ 223 Digital ............................................ 213 In the Instrument cluster ................. 36 Segments ...................................... 208 Selecting the display unit ............... 223

SPORT handling mode Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 71 Warning lamp ................................. 261

Standing lamps Display message ............................ 239 Switching on/off ........................... 112

Start button Display message ............................ 256

Start/Stop button Key positions ................................. 133 Starting the engine ........................ 134

Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 133 STEER CONTROL .................................. 75 Steering

Display message ............................ 254 Warning lamps ............................... 267

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot .. 169

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS)

Display message ............................ 248 Steering assistant STEER CON- TROL

see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 105 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 104 Button overview ............................... 37 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 209 Cleaning ......................................... 317 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 105 Important safety notes .................. 104 Storing settings (memory func- tion) ............................................... 109

Steering wheel heating Problem (malfunction) ................... 105 Switching on/off ........................... 105

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 145 Stop&Go Pilot and Steering Assist .. 169 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 225 Stowage areas ................................... 278 Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 279 Center console .............................. 279 Cup holders ................................... 290 Door ............................................... 280 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 279 Glove box ....................................... 279 Important safety information ......... 278 Map pockets .................................. 280 Rear ............................................... 280 Stowage net ................................... 280 see Stowage areas

Stowage net ....................................... 280 Summer tires

In winter ........................................ 338 Sun visor ............................................ 291 Suspension settings

AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 173 Suspension tuning

AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 174 SETUP (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 225

20 Index

SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 30

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 128 Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 276

T Tachometer ........................................ 209 Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 239 Tailgate

Display message ............................ 253 Emergency unlocking ....................... 89 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ..................... 87 Important safety notes .................... 84 Limiting the opening angle ............... 89 Obstruction detection ...................... 85 Opening dimensions ...................... 370 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 88 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 86 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 85 Reversing feature ............................. 85

Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 36

Technical data Capacities ...................................... 364 Drawbar load (maximum) ............... 371 Information .................................... 362 Trailer loads ................................... 371 Vehicle data ................................... 370

Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 218 Authorizing a mobile phone (con- necting) ......................................... 275 Connecting a mobile phone (gen- eral information) ............................ 275 Display message ............................ 254 Introduction ................................... 218 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 218 Number from the phone book ........ 218 Redialing ........................................ 219 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 218

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268 Switching between mobile phones ........................................... 276 see Mobile phone

Temperature Coolant (display in the instrument cluster) .......................................... 209 Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 224 Outside temperature ...................... 209 Setting (climate control) ................ 126 Transmission oil (on-board com- puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 224

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 225 Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 343 Checking manually ........................ 342 Display message ............................ 250 Maximum ....................................... 342 Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 324 Notes ............................................. 341 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 324 Recommended ............................... 339 Using the TIREFIT kit ...................... 323

Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ 342 Important safety notes .................. 342 Restarting ...................................... 343

Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure elec- tronically ........................................ 345 Function/notes ............................. 343 General notes ................................ 343 Important safety notes .................. 344 Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... 346 Restarting ...................................... 345 Warning lamp ................................. 266 Warning message .......................... 345

Tire pressure sensors Display message ............................ 251

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 320 TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes .................. 322 Storage location ............................ 320 Tire pressure not reached .............. 324 Tire pressure reached .................... 324

Index 21

Using ............................................. 323 Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 355 Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... 354 Bar (definition) ............................... 354 Changing a wheel .......................... 356 Characteristics .............................. 354 Checking ........................................ 336 Curb weight (definition) ................. 355 Definition of terms ......................... 354 Direction of rotation ...................... 356 Display message ............................ 250 Distribution of the vehicle occu- pants (definition) ............................ 356 DOT (Department of Transporta- tion) (definition) ............................. 354 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... 353 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... 354 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- inition) ........................................... 355 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) (definition) .............................. 355 Important safety notes .................. 336 Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... 354 Information on driving .................... 336 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 355 Labeling (overview) ........................ 351 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 356 Load index ..................................... 353 Load index (definition) ................... 355 Maximum load on a tire (defini- tion) ............................................... 355 Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... 355 Maximum permissible tire pres- sure (definition) ............................. 355 Maximum tire load ......................... 353 Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 355 MOExtended tires .......................... 338 Optional equipment weight (defi- nition) ............................................ 356 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- inition) ........................................... 355 Replacing ....................................... 356

Service life ..................................... 337 Sidewall (definition) ....................... 355 Snow chains .................................. 338 Speed rating (definition) ................ 355 Storing ........................................... 357 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 354 Summer tires in winter .................. 338 Temperature .................................. 350 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 356 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 355 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 355 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 354 Tire size (data) ............................... 360 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 351 Tire tread ....................................... 337 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 355 Total load limit (definition) ............. 356 Traction ......................................... 350 Traction (definition) ....................... 356 Tread wear ..................................... 350 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 349 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 354 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 356 Wheel and tire combination ........... 360 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 354 see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 61 Topping up

DEF ................................................ 151 Touchpad

Changing the station/music track .............................................. 271 Character suggestions ................... 270 Deleting characters ....................... 270 Entering a space ............................ 270 Entering characters ....................... 270 Gesture control .............................. 270 Handwriting recognition ................ 270 Operating the touchpad ................. 270 Overview ........................................ 270 Quick access for Audio .................. 271 Switching ....................................... 270 Switching input line ....................... 270

22 Index

Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 333 Important safety notes .................. 330

Towing a trailer Axle load, permissible .................... 371 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 316 Coupling up a trailer ...................... 204 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 206 Driving tips .................................... 203 ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ............................................... 73 Important safety notes .................. 202 Installing the ball coupling ............. 204 Lights display message .................. 239 Power supply ................................. 206 Pulling away with a trailer .............. 135 Removing the ball coupling ............ 206 Trailer loads ................................... 371

Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 330 Installing the towing eye ................ 331 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 333 Removing the towing eye ............... 332 Transporting the vehicle ................ 332 With both axles on the ground ....... 332

Towing eye ......................................... 320 Traffic reports

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Traffic Sign Assist Display message ............................ 247 Function/notes ............................. 192 Important safety notes .................. 193 Instrument cluster display ............. 193

Trailer coupling see Towing a trailer

Trailer loads and drawbar nose- weights ............................................... 206 Trailer towing

Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 202 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 195 Permissible trailer loads and drawbar noseweights ..................... 206

Transfer case ..................................... 148 Transmission

Display message ............................ 253 see Automatic transmission

Transmission oil Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 224

Transmission position display ......... 142 Transporting the vehicle .................. 332 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 317 Trip computer (on-board com- puter) .................................................. 213 Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 212 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 214

Trunk see Cargo compartment

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 370 Turn signals

Display message ............................ 239 Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 117 Switching on/off ........................... 112

Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 362 Installation ..................................... 362 Transmission output (maximum) .... 362

Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate

U Unlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 84 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 83

USB devices Connecting to the Media Inter- face ............................................... 276

V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 291 Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 31 Data acquisition ............................... 32 Display message ............................ 252 Electronics ..................................... 362 Equipment ....................................... 28 Individual settings .......................... 220 Limited Warranty ............................. 32 Loading .......................................... 346

Index 23

Locking (in an emergency) ............... 84 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 77 Lowering ........................................ 360 Maintenance .................................... 29 Operating safety .............................. 30 Operation outside the USA/ Canada ............................................ 29 Parking .......................................... 154 Parking for a long period ................ 157 Pulling away ................................... 135 Raising ........................................... 357 Reporting problems ......................... 31 Securing from rolling away ............ 357 Technical data ............................... 362 Towing away .................................. 330 Transporting .................................. 332 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 84 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 77 Vehicle data ................................... 370

Vehicle data Dimensions .................................... 370

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 84 Vehicle identification number

see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 363 Vehicle level

AIR BODY CONTROL ...................... 173 Display message ............................ 244

Video Operating the DVD ......................... 217 see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

VIN Seat ............................................... 364 Type plate ...................................... 363

W Warning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 259 Air bags ......................................... 262 Brakes ........................................... 258 Coolant .......................................... 263 Distance warning ........................... 265 Engine diagnostics ......................... 263 ESP .............................................. 259 ESP OFF ....................................... 261 Fuel tank ........................................ 263

General notes ................................ 256 Overview .......................................... 36 Parking brake ................................ 262 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 44 Reserve fuel ................................... 263 Restraint system ............................ 262 Seat belt ........................................ 256 SPORT handling mode ................... 261 Steering ......................................... 267 Tire pressure monitor .................... 266

Warranty .............................................. 28 Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 254 Weather display (COMAND)

see also Digital Operator's Man- ual .................................................. 268

Wheel and tire combinations Tires ............................................... 360

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 360 Wheel chock ...................................... 357 Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 356 Checking ........................................ 336 Cleaning ......................................... 314 Important safety notes .................. 336 Information on driving .................... 336 Interchanging/changing ................ 356 Mounting a new wheel ................... 359 Mounting a wheel .......................... 357 Removing a wheel .......................... 359 Snow chains .................................. 338 Storing ........................................... 357 Tightening torque ........................... 360 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 360

Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 236 Operation ......................................... 50

Windows see Side windows

Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 126

Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 310 Important safety notes .................. 369

Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 122

24 Index

Rear window wiper ........................ 120 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 120 Switching on/off ........................... 119

Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 338 Slippery road surfaces ................... 161 Snow chains .................................. 338

Winter operation Radiator cover ............................... 307 Summer tires ................................. 338

Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 338

Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 315 Important safety notes .................. 120 Replacing ....................................... 120 Replacing (rear window) ................ 121 Replacing (windshield) ................... 120

Without changing gears Display message ............................ 253

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc- tions) .................................................. 317 Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 25

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor- mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre- hensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys- tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man- ual via the multimedia system.

i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi- cle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. RContents You can select individual sections in the con- tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva- ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man- ual X Press the button on the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears.

X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning3 or pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man- ual

General notes Please observe the information about the oper- ation of the controller (Y page 269).

Content pages The content pages can be accessed bymeans of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents.

X To scroll forward/back: turn3 the con- troller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information text or save book- marks: slide9 the controller to the right;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controller downwards=.

X To exit a content page: select the% symbol?.

X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the$,%, or button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper- ator's Manual remains open in the back- ground.

26 Digital Operator's Manual

Protecting the environment

General notes

H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- hensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmen- tally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style: Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to of its maximum engine speed. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- tion.

Environmental concerns and recom- mendations Wherever the Operator'sManual requires you to dispose ofmaterials, first try to regenerate or re- use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materi- als. In this way you will help to protect the envi- ronment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajor assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio sys- tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved byMercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 27

In tr od uc tio

n

Z

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehi- cle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been spe- cifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro- vide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 363).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipment i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publica- tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe- cific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety- relevant systems and functions. The equip- ment in your vehiclemay therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustra- tions.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys- tems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- let are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Warranty The Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and condi- tions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System War- ranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace- ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor- mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor- nia Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reason- able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre- sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the substantial defect or malfunction can

result in death or serious injuries for the

28 Service and vehicle operation In tr od uc tio

n

vehicle occupants while driving and this defect has already been repaired at least twice and Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been informed in writing of the necessity of a repair.

(2) the defect or malfunction, though less seri- ous than (1) above, has already been repaired at least four times and Mercedes- Benz has been informed in writing of the necessity of a repair.

(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than 30 calendar days because of repair work resulting from this or other substantial defects or malfunctions.

Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Maintenance Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you when taking the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service advisor will enter every service into your Main- tenance Booklet on your behalf.

Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- gram offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis- tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100(Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty Booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu- ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own- ership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact- ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter- ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: RService facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel can cause damage to the catalytic converter. RThe fuel may have a considerably lower octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Deliv- ery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Service and vehicle operation 29

In tr od uc tio

n

Z

Sports Utility Vehicle

G WARNING Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event of an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your speed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll- over rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signif- icantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/mainte- nance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigsmay ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, a speed bump or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under- body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unex- pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the loads they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, com- bustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour- ney you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity forwireless vehicle components USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

30 Operating safety In tr od uc tio

n

subject to the two following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affec- ted. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con- nection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con- nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor- mation being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspec- tion.

Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel- evant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifica- tions Rwork on electronic components

Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth- ers could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rtechnical data for the vehicle Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi- ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti- fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat- isfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-

Operating safety 31

In tr od uc tio

n

Z

essary, contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC 3 Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is reproduced as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-

ventions against these instructions is not cov- ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War- ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res- cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storage A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or perma- nently store technical information about: Rthe vehicle's operating state Rincidents Rmalfunctions In general, this technical information docu- ments the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in move- ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy- ment, intervention of stability control sys- tems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature

32 Data stored in the vehicle In tr od uc tio

n

This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc- tions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci- dent Roptimize vehicle functions The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- mation can be read from the event datamemory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser- vice network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor- mation is obtained from it, if required. After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- mation is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are con- ceivable in which this technical data, in connec- tion with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been con- tractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- cle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emer- gency.

COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- uations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- tem. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's

Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi- tions.

Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy- ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: RHow various systems in your vehicle were operating RWhether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and RHow fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better under- standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDRdata are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa- tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data rou- tinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforce- ment, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci- dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.

Data stored in the vehicle 33

In tr od uc tio

n

Z

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforce- ment; by federal, state or local government; in connectionwith or arising out of litigation involv- ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter- ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys- tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

Free and open-source software Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and, including updates, on the following web- site: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks Registered trademarks: RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are reg- istered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink is a registered trademark of John- son Controls. RiPod and iTunes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RBurmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. RMicrosoft and Windows media are regis- tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq- uity Digital Corporation. RGracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGAT Survey and related brands are regis- tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

34 Information on copyright In tr od uc tio

n

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift- ers 145

; Combination switch 112

= Horn

? Instrument cluster 36

A DIRECT SELECT lever 141

B Climate control systems 123

C Overhead control panel 41

D Control panel for multimedia system and vehicle functions 38

E Ignition lock 132 Start/Stop button 133

F Adjusts the steering wheel 104

G Cruise control lever 162

Function Page

H Electric parking brake 155

I Diagnostics connection 31

J Opens the hood 306

K Light switch 111

L Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot 169 Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist 200 Deactivating PARKTRONIC 175 Switching on the 360 cam- era 187 Switching on the Head-up Display 211 Vehicles without a driver assistance system: map/ coin holder

Cockpit 35

At a gl an ce

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Speedometer with segments 208 Warning and indicator lamps: ESP OFF 259 ESP 259 Distance warning 265 Power steering assis- tance malfunctioning 267 6 Restraint system 44 Seat belt not fastened 256 K High-beam headlamps 112 L Low-beam headlamps 112 T Parking lamps 112 R Rear fog lamp 112 h Tire pressure monitor 266

; #! Turn signals 112

= Multifunction display 210

? Tachometer 209 Warning and indicator lamps: ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 262

Function Page ! ABS malfunctioning 259 ; Check Engine 263 % Diesel engine: preglow 134 Electric parking brake applied (red) 262 F USA only ! Canada only Brakes (red) 258 $ USA only J Canada only M SPORT handling mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 261

A Coolant temperature gauge 209 Warning and indicator lamps: ? Coolant too hot/cold 263

B Fuel level indicator Warning and indicator lamps: 8 Reserve fuel level with fuel filler flap location indica- tor (right) 263

i Information on displaying the outside tem- perature in the multifunction display can be

found under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 209).

36 Instrument cluster At

a gl an ce

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 210

; Multimedia system display

= ~ Rejects or ends a call 6Makes or accepts a call Further telephone functions 218 WX Adjusts volume 8 Mute Switches on voice- operated control for naviga- tion or the Voice Control Sys- tem

Function Page

? Opens the menu list 9: Selects a menu a Confirms the selection % Back Operates the on-board com- puter 209 Switches on voice- operated control for naviga- tion or the Voice Control Sys- tem

i Vehicles with Audio 20 multimedia sys- tem: you can find further information Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron voice-controlled navigation in the man- ufacturer's operating instructions

i Vehicles with COMAND multimedia sys- tem: you can find further information Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the sepa- rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 37

At a gl an ce

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Climate control systems 123

; Hazard warning lamps 113

= Vehicle functions/ system settings button (see Digital Operator's Manual)

? % Telephone button (see Digital Operator's Manual)

A PASSENGER AIRBAG indica- tor lamps 44 ATA indicator lamp 76

Function Page

B Media button (see Dig- ital Operator's Manual)

C $ Radio button (see Digi- tal Operator's Manual)

D Navigation button (see Digital Operator's Manual)

E Inserts or ejects a CD or DVD (see Digital Opera- tor's Manual)

38 Center console At

a gl an ce

Center console, lower section (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 278 Ashtray 292 Cigarette lighter 292 Socket 293 Cup holder 290

; Adjusts the volume 269 Switches the sound on or off 269

= Switches the multime- dia system on/off 269

? Touchpad 270

A Opens stowage compart- ment with Media Interface 278

Function Page

B ECO start/stop func- tion 136

C c Deactivates PARKTRONIC 175 Adjusts the vehicle level (AIR BODY CONTROL) 173

D DYNAMIC SELECT switch 139

E % Back button 269

F Controller 269

G g Favorites button 271

Center console 39

At a gl an ce

Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Function Page

: Stowage compartment 278 Ashtray 292 Cigarette lighter 292 Socket 293 Cup holder 290

; Adjusts the volume 269 Switches the sound on or off 269

= Switches the multime- dia system on/off 269

? ECO start/stop func- tion 136

A Adjusts the vehicle level (AIR BODY CONTROL) 173

B Opens stowage compart- ment with Media Interface 278

Function Page

C Touchpad 270

D Activates/deactivates ESP 71 M Activates/deactivates SPORT handling mode 71

E AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODY CON- TROL 174

F Manual gearshifting (perma- nent setting) 145

G DYNAMIC SELECT switch 139

H % Back button 269

I Controller 269

J g Favorites button 271

40 Center console At

a gl an ce

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 115

; |Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 115

= G SOS button (mbrace system) 296

? c Switches the front inte- rior lighting on/off 115

A u Switches the rear inte- rior lighting on/off 115

B p Switches the right- hand reading lamp on/off 115

C Info call button (mbrace system) 298

Function Page

D Eyeglasses compartment 279

E 3 Operates the pano- rama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel 94 Operates the roller sunblinds 95

F Rear-view mirror Automatic anti-glare 108

G Buttons for the garage door opener 303

H Microphone for mbrace sys- tem, telephone and the Voice Control System, see the sep- arate operating instructions

I F Breakdown assistance call button (mbrace system) 297

Overhead control panel 41

At a gl an ce

Door control panel

Function Page

: r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering column 109

; Adjusts the seats electrically 100

= c Seat heating 102

? s Seat ventilation 103

A Opens the door 83

B %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 83

C W Opens/closes the rear left side window 90

D W Opens/closes the left side window 90

Function Page

E 7Z\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors out/in electrically 107

F WOpens/closes the right side window 90

G W Opens/closes the rear right side window 90

H nOverride feature for the controls in the rear compart- ment 64

I p Opens/closes the tail- gate 88

42 Door control panel At

a gl an ce

Panic alarm

X To arm: press and hold the! button: for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed.

X To disarm: press the! button: again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- cle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces towhich vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: Rseat belt system Rair bags Rchild restraint system Rchild seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 46) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 98).

As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 98). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 48). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For exam- ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed.When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that par- ticular accident situation are deployed. How- ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 55). For information on children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59).

Important safety notes

G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function andmay fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify components of the restraint system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use driving aids which have been approved specifi- cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety 43

Sa fe ty

Z

Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec- onds after the vehicle is started. The compo- nents of the restraint system are in operational readiness. Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig- gered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This can affect for example the Emergency Tensioning Device or the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp: and PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS).

The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec- onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an acci- dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol- lowing points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the instal- led child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Chil- dren in the vehicle" (Y page 59). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classi- fication of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena- bled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts (Y page 44) and "Air bags" (Y page 48). There you can also find infor- mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur- thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

44 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system comprises: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- ted any further. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close against the body. However it does not pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction of the backrest. The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor- rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu- pants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten- sioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced.

Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Evenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNING If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause

injuries, for example, in the event of an acci- dent or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- ting properly.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position.When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

G WARNING Persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without an addi- tional and suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per- form its intended protective function. An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an acci- dent or when braking or changing direction abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50m) tall in suitable additional restraint systems.

If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro- priate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint

Occupant safety 45

Sa fe ty

Z

system manufacturer's installation and oper- ating instructions Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 51)

G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi- fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible, e.g. due to splinters of glass.Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- ing an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you install anothermulti-point seat belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide the best level of protection.

G WARNING If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Only use the standard three-point seat belt. Never modify the seat belt system.

Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 45). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be dis- tributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin- ted or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that there are never objects between a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug- gage or loads (Y page 278).

46 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 45) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 46). If the center rear seat belt is being used, also observe the information about the seat belt for the center rear seat (Y page 47).

Basic illustration X Adjust the seat (Y page 98). The seat backrest must be in an almost upright position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet and engage belt tongue; into belt buckle:. The seat belt on the drivers seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened auto- matically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47).

X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.

The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the center of the shoul- der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. X To raise: slide the belt outlet up. The belt outlet will engage in various posi- tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release= and slide the belt outlet down.

X Let go of belt outlet release= in the desired position and make sure that the belt outlet engages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 59).

Seat belt for the center rear seat If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, the rear center seat belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out. X To release the rear center seat belt: pull the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest and then release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released.

Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back.

Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE convenience function. This func- tion adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust- ing. You can activate and deactivate the seat-belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys- tem. Information on activating and deactivating the seat-belt adjustment function can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu- pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone.

Occupant safety 47

Sa fe ty

Z

Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn- ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas- tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv- er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas- tened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn- ing is activated again.

Air bags

Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be rec- ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in appli- cable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independ- ently from one another (Y page 55). However, no system available today can com- pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when

deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly andmaintain the great- est possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi- tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. Youmay otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash- board, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys- tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-

48 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

passenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 44). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it.

G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per- formed correctly to the doors or door panel- ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door pan-

eling carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Front air bags ! Do not place heavy objects on the front- passenger seat. This could cause the system to identify the seat as being occupied. In the event of an accident, the restraint systems on the front-passenger side may be triggered and have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer- ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- tional head and thorax protection for the occu- pants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 44). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 51). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit (Y page 51) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity

Occupant safety 49

Sa fe ty

Z

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is triggered together with the front air bag. The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat.

Side impact air bags

G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre- vent deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the operation of the occupant classification system (OCS) could be adversely affected. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear side impact air bags; deploy next to the outer bol- ster of the seat backrest.

When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 55).

50 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Occupant Classification System (OCS)

Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat- egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Requirements To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica- tion, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- selves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a cushion. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front- passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.

Occupant Classification System opera- tion (OCS)

: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lampsmust light up simul- taneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec- onds, subsequently both indicator lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAGOFF lights up: the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an acci- dent.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changeswhile the vehicle is inmotion, an air bag displaymessage appears in the instrument clus- ter (Y page 237). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey.

Occupant safety 51

Sa fe ty

Z

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front- passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- cially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the jour- ney, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct.

G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp stays off, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problemswith theOccupant Classification Sys- tem" (Y page 54).

G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front- passenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelvemonths old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indi- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp can go out after the system self-test. This indi- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is

52 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per- son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, goes out. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a per- son of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the system self-test. This indi- cates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). When the occupant classification system (OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front- passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The front- passenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceler- ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- pant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective func- tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- passenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dash- board. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- bled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a cor- rectly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-

Occupant safety 53

Sa fe ty

Z

passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- cation System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS oper- ation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-

facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's instal- lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 51). If the front-passenger front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then goes out. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front-passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. For more information about the OCS, see "Prob- lems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 54).

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 53).

54 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit, even though the front- passenger seat is occu- pied by an adult or a per- son of a stature corre- sponding to that of an adult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor- rect. X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front- passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: Runoccupied Roccupied with the weight of a child up to twelve months old in a child restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord- ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom- mended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- tection and cannot provide the intended pro- tection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- ist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced

Occupant safety 55

Sa fe ty

Z

and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNING Emergency Tensioning Devices that have deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera- tional and are unable to perform their inten- ded protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE to trig- ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- ing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to pre- vent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physi- cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel- eration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision.

An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 44) Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the respective front seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independ- ently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags and driver's knee bag RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter- mines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 44). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec- ond deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten- sioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-

56 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deploy- ment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with- out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma- tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable components of the restraint system are activa- ted independently of each other depending on the apparent type of accident. RSide impact air bags on the side where the impact takes place, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer seats in the second row The side impact air bag on the front- passenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is occupied or

- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front- passenger seat is occupied RFront Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection for the vehicle occu- pants in this situation RRear Emergency Tensioning Devices in cer- tain situations if the vehicle rolls over RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer addi- tional protection to that provided by the seat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independ- ently of each other.

How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- eration and the apparent type of accident: RFrontal collision RSide impact RRollover

PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection system)

Introduction In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehi- cle occupants.

Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be dam- aged when PRE-SAFE is activated.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE system, the possibility of personal injuries occurring as a result of an accident can- not be eliminated. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Function PRE-SAFE intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi- cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under- steers or oversteers severely Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package: when a driver assistance system intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor systemdetects an imminent danger of collision in certain sit- uations

Occupant safety 57

Sa fe ty

Z

PRE-SAFE takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. Rvehicles with the memory function for the front-passenger seat: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable posi- tion.

If the hazardous situation passes without result- ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE convenience function. Informa- tion about the convenience function can be found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47).

PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu- pant protection system PLUS)

Introduction PRE-SAFE PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit- uations, PRE-SAFE PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notes The intervention of PRE-SAFE PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned about the intervention of PRE-SAFE PLUS. PRE-SAFE PLUS does not intervene: Rif the vehicle is backing up Rwhen the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear-end collision

When driving, or when parking or exiting a park- ing space with assistance from Active Parking

Assist, PRE-SAFE PLUS will not apply the brakes.

Function PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes in certain situa- tions if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear- end collision is imminent: - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE PLUS braking application is can- celed: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away

If the hazardous situation passes without result- ing in an accident, the original settings are restored.

Automatic measures after an acci- dent Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rvehicles with a memory function: the electri- cally adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call

58 Occupant safety Sa fe ty

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropri- ate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 51)

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 45) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 46). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly.

All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once the child seat is secured.

Children in the vehicle 59

Sa fe ty

Z

Installing a child restraint system: X Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out- let.

X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled.

X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing the child restraint system and deac- tivating the special seat belt retractor: X Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions.

X Press the release button of the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back towards the belt sash guide. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint system The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incor- rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is

always resting completely on the seat cush- ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incor- rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, strik- ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems prop- erly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint sys- tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage and loads securely under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 278).

G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing sys- tems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- ing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again.

Securing systems for child restraint systems include: Rthe seat belt system Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings RTop Tether anchorage points If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger's seat, be sure to observe

60 Children in the vehicle Sa fe ty

the instructions on Occupant Classification System (OCS) (Y page 51). This includes infor- mation on deactivating the front-passenger's air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the fol- lowing standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2

A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction label on the child restraint system. You will also find the state- ment in the instructionmanual providedwith the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- ing system

G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- lation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

! When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could otherwise be damaged.

Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the rear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings: for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system are accessible. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an acci- dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.

Children in the vehicle 61

Sa fe ty

Z

in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after instal- ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri- fication indicator.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster.

Top Tether anchorages

Top Tether anchorage points? are located on the rear side of the rear seat backrests. X Move head restraint: upwards. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltB under head restraint: between the two head restraint bars.

X Guide Top Tether beltBdownbetween cargo compartment cover= and rear seat back- rest;.

X Hook Top Tether hookA into Top Tether anchorage? on the back of rear seat back- rest;.

X Make sure that Top Tether beltB is not twis- ted.

X Tension Top Tether beltB. Always comply with the child restraint system manufactur- er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Move head restraint: back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 101). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct rout- ing of Top Tether beltB.

Child restraint system on the front- passenger seat

General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes- Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger's seat, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51). This will help to rule out any risks that may arise due to: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front- passenger's seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front- passenger's front air bag Ran unfavorable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too near to the dash- board

Rearward-facing child restraint system Only secure a child on the front-passenger's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint system if the front-passenger front air bag has been deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 44) is the front-passenger's front air bag deactivated. Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- lation and operating instructions for the child restraint system.

62 Children in the vehicle Sa fe ty

Forward-facing child restraint system Always move the front-passenger's seat as far back as possible if the child must be secured on the front-passenger seat in a forward-facing child restraint system. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger's seat. As much as possible of the backrest of the child restraint system must be resting on the backrest of the front- passenger's seat. The child restraint system may not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Alwaysmake sure the shoulder belt is correctly secured, running from the belt outlet to the belt guide of the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward and down from the vehicle belt outlet. Adjust the belt outlet and front-passenger seat as required. Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- lation and operating instructions for the child restraint system.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for: Rthe rear doors (Y page 64) Rthe rear side windows (Y page 64)

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Children in the vehicle 63

Sa fe ty

Z

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with the child- proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks arework- ing properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win- dows

X To enable/disable: press button;. If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp: is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear com- partment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- cle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 65) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 65) RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake AssistSystemPLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist) (Y page 66) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 67) RESP (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 70) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 73) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 73) RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 73) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 75)

64 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions andmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is ade- quate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the informa- tion regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 336). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehiclewhen braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking charac- teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- ally, further driving safety systems are deac-

tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- ding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 259) and dis- play messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 228).

Braking X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

Driving safety systems 65

Sa fe ty

Z

Braking X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

General information BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 65).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- cle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake sys- tem is still available with complete brake boost- ing effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66).

Important safety notes

G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo- ple, this is especially the case if they are mov- ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children Rto animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- ognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- ple in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike

66 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor system detection range

Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Ror if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a pedestrian is not distinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera sys- tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and RBAS PLUS has detected a danger of collision At speeds of more than20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is acti- vated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment. At speeds of above20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically increases the brake pressure to a degree suited to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- ardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robstacles crossing your path, which move in the detection range of the sensors and are recognized by them

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak- ing force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simulta- neously (Y page 57).

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- tion as usual, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi- cle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS

General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autono- mous braking function and Adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will bewarned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

Driving safety systems 67

Sa fe ty

Z

Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- ple in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLI- SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the important safety notes in the "Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 131).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is automatically active after switching on the igni- tion. You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com- puter (Y page 220). When deactivated, the dis- tance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General information The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 65).

G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function.

Function Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you are rapidly approaching a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front.

or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- ded period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can

68 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

also react to stationary obstacles, such as stop- ped or parked vehicles.

Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warn- ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R465 mph (7105 km/h) for moving objects R431mph (750 km/h) for stationary objects Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autono- mous braking function is available in the follow- ing speed ranges: R4124mph (7200 km/h) for moving objects R431mph (750 km/h) for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func- tion to intervene. If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simultaneously (Y page 57).

Adaptive Brake Assist

General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis- tance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- tance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already

been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta- tionary obstacles. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger pro- tection measures (PRE-SAFE) are activated simultaneously (Y page 57). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi- cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion for driving safety systems (Y page 65).

G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa- tions. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

Driving safety systems 69

Sa fe ty

Z

Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS.

ESP (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

ESP monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehi- cle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

ETS traction control is part of ESP. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP. Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer- red to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

G WARNING If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- ing safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the ESP OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP is deactivated. If the ESP warning lamp lights up contin- uously, ESP is not available due to a malfunc- tion. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 259) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 228). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP function properly.

Characteristics of ESP

General information If the ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP is automatically active. If ESP intervenes, the ESPwarning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP intervenes: X Do not deactivate ESP under any circum- stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP remains in its previously selected status, e.g. if ESP was deactivated before the engine was automatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP (except MercedesAMG vehicles)

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

70 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

You can select between the following states of ESP: RESP is activated. RESP is deactivated.

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow- ing situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip.

i Activate ESP as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP

X To deactivate: press button:. The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

X To activate: press button:. The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP is deactivated If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP: RESP no longer improves driving stability. REngine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RTraction control is still activated. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP. RPRE-SAFE is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP inter- venes. RPRE-SAFE Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP intervenes. RESP still provides support when you brake firmly.

Deactivating/activating ESP (MercedesAMG vehicles)

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

You can select between the following states of ESP: RESP is activated. RSPORT handling mode is activated. RESP is deactivated.

G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and acci- dents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit- uations described in the following.

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

Driving safety systems 71

Sa fe ty

Z

Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehi- cle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired

Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action which provides better grip. Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP requires an extremely qualified and expe- rienced driver.

i Activate ESP as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

Deactivating/activating ESP

X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button:. TheM SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. TheSPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button:. TheM SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP: press button: until the ESP OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The OFF message appears in the multi- function display.

X To activate ESP: briefly press button:. The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ON message appears in themultifunction display.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han- dling mode If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ESP warn- ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: RESP only improves driving stability to a limi- ted degree. RTraction control is still activated. REngine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RESP still provides support when you brake firmly.

Characteristics when ESP is deactivated If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa- tions, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP: RESP no longer improves driving stability. REngine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. RTraction control is still activated. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP. RPRE-SAFE is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP inter- venes. RPRE-SAFE Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP intervenes. RESP still provides support when you brake firmly.

72 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

ESP trailer stabilization

General information If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to swerve, ESP assists you in this situation. ESP slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com- bination has stabilized.

Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com- bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP trailer stabilization is active above speeds of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h). ESP trailer stabilization does not work if ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning.

Crosswind Assist

General information Strong crosswind gusts can impair the ability of your vehicle to drive straight ahead. The cross- wind driving assistance function integrated in ESP noticeably reduces these impairments. ESP intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affect- ing your vehicle. ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently.

Important safety notes Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP is switched off or deactivated because of a mal- function.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu- tion)

General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 259) as well as display messages (Y page 230).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 171) and hill start assist (Y page 136).

PRE-SAFE Brake

General information PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFEBrake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 65).

PRESAFE Brake is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package.

Driving safety systems 73

Sa fe ty

Z

For PRE-SAFEBrake to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- cle can be detected. PRE-SAFE Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body con- tours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 74).

Important safety notes

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake will initially brake your vehi- cle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, partic- ularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- tify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- tify people, especially if they are moving. In these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake cannot inter- vene. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE Brake warns you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children Rto animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit- uations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- ognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- ple in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky

74 Driving safety systems Sa fe ty

Rdarkness Ror if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a pedestrian is not distinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera sys- tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti- vate PRE-SAFE Brake in the on-board com- puter (Y page 221). If the PRE-SAFE Brake is not activated, the symbol appears in themultifunction dis- play.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you are rapidly approaching a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the dis- tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- ment cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.

PRE-SAFE Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front passenger have their seat belts fastened Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE Brake can also detect: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE) are triggered (Y page 57).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until imme- diately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- SAFE Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. Ractivating kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal The braking action of PRE-SAFE Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Ran obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle.

STEER CONTROL

General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake Rthe vehicle begins to skid

Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 65).

No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP is deactivated RESP is malfunctioning Rthe steering is malfunctioning If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering.

Driving safety systems 75

Sa fe ty

Z

Protection against theft

Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-func- tion or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys- tem is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately ten seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart- Key or KEYLESS-GO.

or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe tailgate Rthe hood X To stop the alarm with the SmartKey: press the% or& button on the Smart- Key. The alarm is stopped.

or X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- tion lock (Y page 133).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is stopped.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is stopped.

or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi- cle. The alarm is stopped.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.

i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys- tem automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends a message or establishes a data connection provided that: Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available.

76 Protection against theft Sa fe ty

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin- ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the Smart- Key.

VehicleswithKEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart- ment. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. A brief radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing

SmartKey functions

: & Locks the vehicle ; F Opens/closes the tailgate = % Unlocks the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press% button. If you do not open the vehicle within approx- imately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rprotection against theft is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the following components: Rthe doors Rthe tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated via the

SmartKey 77

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

multimedia system; see the Digital Operator's Manual. You will receive visual and acoustic locking con- firmation if all components were able to be locked. When the locator lighting is activated via the multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey; see the Digital Operator's Manual.

X To open the tailgate automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold theF button until the tailgate opens.

X To close the tailgate automatically from outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca- ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press theF button on the SmartKey. When the tailgate closes you can then release the button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- Key in the vehicle (Y page 134).

Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the func- tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven- tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the han- dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A brief radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface: or;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle.

X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience clos- ing feature (Y page 91).

X To unlock the tailgate: pull the tailgate han- dle.

Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehiclemust not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the& button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp (Y page 80) of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

X To activate: press any button on the Smart- Key.

or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again.

78 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

KEYLESS-GO start function

General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a Smart- Key in the vehicle (Y page 134).

Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking sys- tem. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel alone. X To change the setting: press and hold down the% and& buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the bat- tery check lamp (Y page 80) flashes twice.

If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the% button once. X To unlock centrally: press the% button twice.

X To lock: press the& button. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold the% and& buttons simultane- ously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (Y page 80) flashes twice.

The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles.

Mechanical key

General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys- tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto- matically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechan- ical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about: RLocking/unlocking the driver's door (Y page 84) RUnlocking the tailgate (Y page 89)

Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey 79

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seekmedical attention immediately.

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guide- lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal- ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp: lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 80). If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the& or% button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 79).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until bat- tery compartment cover: opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

80 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter- minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover: into the housing first and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey (Y page 79).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary (Y page 80).

If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

The SmartKey is faulty. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84). X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary (Y page 80).

If this does not work: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84).

SmartKey 81

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con- trol function: X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 84). X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be started using the Smart- Key.

The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 327). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 328). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be started using the Start/ Stop button. The Smart- Key is in the vehicle.

The vehicle is locked. X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 80) and replace it if necessary (Y page 80).

If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart- Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the mechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

82 SmartKey Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors from the inside You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 64). If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76).

X To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle;. If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up. The door is unlocked and opens.

X To unlock a rear door: pull rear door handle. The locking knob on the rear door pops up and the rear door unlocks.

X To open a rear door: pull rear door handle again. The rear door opens.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside. The switches are on the drivers door.

X To unlock: press button:. X To lock: press button;. When the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle is locked.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. If the vehicle has been lockedwith the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but- ton for the central locking, or Rlocked automatically

Doors 83

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ- ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn- ing. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer. You can activate and deactivate the automatic locking mechanism via the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the mechanical key i If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle using the mechanical key, begin by pressing the locking button for the interior locking mech- anism while the driver's door is open. Then lock the driver's door using the mechanical key.

X Insert the mechanical key into opening: in the protective cap.

X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.

X Release the door handle.

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter- clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys- tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76).

Cargo compartment

Important safety notes

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particu- larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes

84 Cargo compartment Op

en in g an d cl os in g

could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tail- gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- den change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.

The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 370). You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate (Y page 89). Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com- partment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the cargo compartment. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).

Tailgate obstruction detection with reversing feature Vehicles with remote tailgate closing: The tailgate is equippedwith automatic obstruc- tion detection with reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgatewhen auto- matically opening, this procedure is stopped. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automatically closing, the tailgate automatically opens again slightly. The automatic obstruction detection with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the tailgate.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not respond: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers Rover the last in (8 mm) of the closing movement

The reversing feature cannot prevent some- one from becoming trapped in these situa- tions in particular. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate or Rpull the handle on the tailgate

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

Opening and closing manually

Opening

X Press theF button on the SmartKey. or X Pull handle:. The tailgate opens.

Cargo compartment 85

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Closing

X Pull the tailgate down using recesses: and push it closed.

X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the& button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 78).

Opening/closing automatically from outside

Important safety notes

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particu- larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tail- gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped dur- ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More- over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.

Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress theF button on the SmartKey. Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate. Rpull the handle on the tailgate

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.

Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing. The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 370).

Opening automatically You can open the tailgate automatically with the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate. X Press and hold theF button on the Smart- Key until the tailgate opens.

or X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle and let it go again immediately.

or X With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate position, pull the tailgate up. You can release the tailgate as soon as the tailgate starts to open.

86 Cargo compartment Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Closing automatically

: Closing button ; Locking button X Press closing button: in the tailgate. or X Pull the tailgate down slightly. You can release the tailgate as soon as the tailgate starts to close.

When the driver's door is closed, you can simul- taneously close the tailgate and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detec- tion range of the vehicle. X Press locking button; in the tailgate. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside the vehicle, the tailgate closes. The vehicle is locked.

or X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start func- tion: if the SmartKey is located in the imme- diate vicinity of the vehicle, press theF button on the SmartKey. You can release the button as soon as the tailgate starts to close.

If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the cargo compartment, the tailgate is unlocked again after closing. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out- side the vehicle, the tailgate remains locked. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the cargo compartment before the closing procedure starts, the tailgate remains open.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS

General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the tailgate or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is use- ful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kickingmovement under the bumperwith your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your per- son. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance, for example on ice.

RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sen- sors:. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Other- wise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RDirt caused by road salt or snow around sen- sors: may restrict functionality. Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a pros- thetic leg may restrict functionality. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detec- tion range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The tailgate

Cargo compartment 87

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

could thus be opened or closed unintention- ally, for example, if you: - install or remove the ball coupling. - couple or uncouple a trailer. - install or remove a rear-mounted bicycle rack.

- load/unload bicycles on/from a rear- mounted bicycle rack.

- sit on the edge of the cargo compartment. - set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle.

- polish the rear of the vehicle. Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situations sim- ilar to these. This will prevent unintentional opening or closing of the tailgate.

Important safety notes

G WARNING The vehicle's exhaust systemmay be very hot. You could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make the kicking move- ment within the detection range of sensors.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- tional opening of the tailgate: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

Operation

X To open or close: kick into sensor detection range: under the bumper with your foot. Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing.

X If the tailgate does not open or close after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then kick under the bumper once again.

If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the tailgate does not open or close. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. To stop the opening or closing procedure, you have the following options: RKick with your foot into sensor detection range: under the bumper. RPull the handle on the outside of the tailgate. RPress the closing button on the tailgate. RPress theF button on the SmartKey If the tailgate closing procedure has been stop- ped: RMove your foot under the bumper again and the tailgate will open.

If the tailgate opening procedure has been stop- ped: RKick with your foot under the bumper again and the tailgate will close.

Opening/closing automatically from inside

Important safety notes

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particu- larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tail- gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped dur- ing automatic closing of the tailgate. In addi- tion, people may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area, e.g. chil-

88 Cargo compartment Op

en in g an d cl os in g

dren, during the closing procedure. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Release the remote operating switch imme- diately if somebody becomes trapped. To re- open the tailgate pull on the remote operating switch.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.

Two warning tones sound while the tailgate is opening or closing. The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 370).

Opening and closing

X To open: pull remote operating switch: for the tailgate until the tailgate opens.

X To close: turn the SmartKey to position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press and hold remote operating switch for tailgate: until the tailgate is completely closed.

When the vehicle is stationary, you can close the tailgate from the driver's seat. When the vehicle is also unlocked, you can also open the tailgate from inside.

Limiting the opening angle of the tail- gate

General notes ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the open- ing angle. The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle out- side.

You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 8 in (20 cm) before the stop. To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically. This does not delete the stored position.

Activating X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the tailgate.

X To stop the opening procedure at the desired position: press the closing button in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again.

X To store the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening.

Deactivating X Press and hold the closing button on the tail- gate until two short tones sound.

Unlocking the tailgate using the mechanical key

General notes Use the mechanical key if the tailgate can no longer be unlocked: Rusing the SmartKey Rusing HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rusing the remote operating switch on the door control panel

Cargo compartment 89

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate.

Unlocking

X Remove cargo compartment cover (Y page 285).

X Fold the rear seat backrest forward (Y page 281).

X Insert mechanical key; into opening: in the paneling and push it in.

X Open the tailgate. When you lock the vehicle, the cargo compart- ment is also locked again.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side win- dow and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side win- dow during the opening procedure. If some- body becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody

becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi- cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an auto- matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from traveling upwards during the automatic closing process, the sidewindowopens again automatically. Dur- ing themanual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corre- sponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi- tute for your attention when closing a side win- dow.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- uations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win- dows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window.

90 Side windows Op

en in g an d cl os in g

The switches on the driver's door take prece- dence.

: Front left ; Front right = Rear right ? Rear left X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor- responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond the pressure point and release it. Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it.

X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the pressure point and release it. Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the corresponding switch again.

If you press the switch beyond the pressure point and release, automatic operation is star- ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again. You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. When the override feature for the side windows is activated, the side windows cannot be oper- ated from the rear (Y page 64). Information on opening and closing the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows (Y page 291).

Convenience opening

General notes If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehi- cle, the convenience opening function is availa- ble. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- ing panel and the roller sunblind Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat

The "convenience opening" feature is also avail- able when the vehicle is unlocked.

Convenience opening X Press and hold the% button on the Smart- Key until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first.

X Press and hold the% button again until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is oper- ating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is oper- ating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure.

Side windows 91

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: if the SmartKey is in close prox- imity to the vehicle, the convenience closing function is available. When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane- ously: Rclose the side windows Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- ing panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller sunblinds. Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rthe side window (Y page 90) Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 94)

Using the SmartKey X Press and hold the& button until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.

X Press and hold the& button again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GO The driver's door and the door at which the han- dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the SmartKey and the corresponding door han- dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on the door handle until the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. Make sure you touch only recessed sensor surface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface: on the door han- dle.

Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is com- pletely closed (Y page 90).

X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 90).

X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.

92 Side windows Op

en in g an d cl os in g

Problems with the side windows

G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

X Remove the objects. X Close the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side windows are closed without the automatic reversing fea- ture.

Panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes In the following section, the term "sliding sun- roof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing pro- cedures.

If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop- ped.

G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 93

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto- matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid- ing sunroof lifts during opening.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid- ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi- cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc- tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi- tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing feature In the following section, the term "sliding sun- roof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto- matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto- matically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing movement

Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman- ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- uations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening and closing

: To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre- sponding direction.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond the pressure point, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop auto- matic operation by pressing or pulling again. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised at the rear, it automatically low- ers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in

94 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Op

en in g an d cl os in g

the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically. You can also temporarily deactivate automatic lowering. To do so, press the3 switch. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel rai- ses again automatically. You can continue to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This func- tion remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. When a roof carrier is mounted the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/slid- ing panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear.

Rain-closing feature The raised panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel automatically lowers when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: Rthe road speed Rthe intensity of the rain You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the3 switch in any direction. To raise the panorama roof with power tilt/slid- ing panel again, press the3 switch in direc- tion:. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated until you: Rpress or pull the3 switch in any direction or Rturn the SmartKey to another position in the ignition lock (Y page 132)

Operating the roller sunblinds for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Important safety notes

G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or slid- ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos- ing. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun- blind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop- ped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblinds are equipped with an auto- matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again auto- matically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute of your attentiveness when closing the roller sun- blind.

G WARNING The reversing feature does not react in par- ticular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep area.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 95

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Opening and closing the roller sun- blinds

: Opens ; Opens = Closes You can only close the roller sunblinds when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the3 switch in direction:. Both roller sunblinds open, then the pano- rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised.

X Pull the3 switch in direction;. The sunblinds open.

X Pull the3 switch in direction=. The roller sunblinds closewhen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed.

If you press or pull the3 switch beyond the pressure point, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop auto- matic operation by pressing or pulling again.

Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front roller sunblind ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblinds if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front roller sunblind does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock.

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow: until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additional second.

X Pull the3 switch several times in the direction of arrow: until the roller sunblinds are closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for an additional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can be fully opened and closed again.

X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel.

96 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Op

en in g an d cl os in g

G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed withmore force.

If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 97

Op en in g an d cl os in g

Z

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel:, seat belt; and driver's seat=: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly

Ryou should have a good overview of traffic conditions Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the center of your shoul- der and across your hips in the pelvic area

Further related subjects: RAdjusting the seats electrically (Y page 100). RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically (Y page 104). RAdjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 105). RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 47). RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors (Y page 107). RStoring the seat, steering wheel, exterior mir- ror and head-up display settings with the memory function (Y page 109).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 59).

G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- tection as intended. There is an increased risk

98 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints instal- led. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints cor- rectly. Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head.

G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- ment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- tem.

G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the back- rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- ing or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heat- ing should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passen- gers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materi- als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats whenmov- ing the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i The rear-compartment head restraints can be removed (Y page 102). For more information, contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

i Related topic: REASY-PACK Quickfold rear bench seat (Y page 281)

Seats 99

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Adjusting the seats electrically

Electrically adjustable seats with memory function

: Head restraint height ; Backrest angle = Seat height ? Seat cushion length A Seat cushion angle B Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

i Further related subjects: RYou can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 109). RIf PRE-SAFE is triggered, the front- passenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavora- ble position (Y page 57). RWhen the seat is moved forward or back, the headrest is moved up or down auto- matically.

Vehicleswith AMGPerformance seat: the height of the head restraints cannot be adjusted.

Electrically adjustable seats without mem- ory function

: Backrest angle ; Seat height

= Seat cushion angle ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Electrically adjustable seats without mem- ory function

: Seat cushion length X Lift lever: and slide the seat cushion forward or back.

X Release lever: again. The seat cushion engages.

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro- tection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints instal- led. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head

100 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

General notes Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 98). Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position.

Adjusting the head restraint height manually

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in the direc- tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the head restraint fore-and- aft position manually

With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head.

X To move forward: pull the head restraint forward in the direction of the arrow until it engages in the desired position.

X To move back: press and hold the release catch:.

X Push the head restraint back. X Release the release button once the head restraint is in the desired position.

X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged properly.

Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the head restraint so that it is as close as possible to your head.

Adjusting the height of the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for the head restraint adjustment (Y page100) up or down in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press release catch:.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired height.

X To lower: press release catch: and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position.

Seats 101

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Installing and removing rear head restraints X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forward (Y page 281).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the head restraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position.

X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it engages.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: Raises the backrest contour ; Softens the backrest contour = Lowers the backrest contour ? Hardens the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum sup- port for your back.

Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat To adjust the contour of the seat and for improved lateral support, you can individually adjust the front seats.

Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cush- ion X To set narrower: press button:. X To set wider: press button;. To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back- rest X To set narrower: press button=. X To set wider: press button?. Adjusting the seat cushion length mechani- cally X Lift handleA and slide the seat cushion forward or back.

X Release leverA again. The seat cushion engages.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high tempera- tures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.

102 Seats Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Front seats

Rear seats The three red indicator lamps in the button indi- cate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approx- imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.

i If drive program E is selected, the power of the seat heating is reduced.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off

The blue indicator lamps in the button indicate the ventilation level you have selected. X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X To switch on:press button: repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and the slid- ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 91). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.

i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan speed can be reduced automatically. This reduces the noises of the seat ventilation.

Seats 103

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Problems with the seat heating / seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The seat heating or seat ventilation has switched off prematurely or can- not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum- ers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat ventilation can be switched back on manually.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the igni- tion lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel man- ually

: Release lever ; Adjusts the steering wheel height = Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment) X Push release lever: down completely. The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi- tion.

X Push release lever: up as far as it will go. The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction.

104 Steering wheel Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Adjusting the steering wheel electri- cally

: Adjusts the steering wheel height ; Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 105) RStoring settings (Y page 109)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc- tion of arrow: or;. Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

If you switch off the ignition, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The steering wheel heat- ing has switched off pre- maturely or cannot be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum- ers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- ing adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

You can stop the adjustment process by press- ing one of the memory function's position but- tons. This function is only available on vehicles with memory function.

G WARNING If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea- ture, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose

Steering wheel 105

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia sys- tem (see the Digital Operator's Manual)

Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel swings up when you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Rwith KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: open the driver's door; the voltage supply must be switched on Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door; the SmartKey must be in positiong or1 in the ignition lock (Y page 132) Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is switched off

i The steering wheel only tilts up if the driving position is stored after the steering column adjustment has been adjusted (Y page 109).

The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored using the memory func- tion (Y page 109)

i The steering wheel only moves up if it has not already reached the upper steering lim- iter.

Position of the steering wheel for driv- ing The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when: Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on Ryou press the Start/Stop button once in vehi- cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function

i The steering wheel only returns to the last set position if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering column has been adjusted (Y page 109).

The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored using the memory func- tion (Y page 109)

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig- gered in an accident, the steering column will move up when the driver's door is opened or the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is operational only if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea- ture is activated in the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual).

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the dis- tance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci- dent.

106 Mirrors Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side: press button;. Exterior mirror on the driver's side: press but- ton=. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected exterior mirror using button: as long as the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press button: up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mir- ror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win- dow defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X Briefly press:. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte- rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or com- pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in if you have activated the AutomaticMirror Folding function in the multimedia system. X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X Briefly press:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically When the Automatic Mirror Folding func- tion is activated in the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati- cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out.

Mirrors 107

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exte- rior mirrors:manually move the exterior mir- ror into the correct position.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold button: until you hear a click and then the mirror engaging in position (Y page 107). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 107).

If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Press and hold button: until you hear a click and the mirror engages audibly into position (Y page 107). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 107).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The exterior mirror on the driver's side and the rear-view mirror automatically go into anti-glare mode if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen- sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir- ror on the front-passenger side

Storing the parking position You can set the front-passenger side exterior mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position.

Storing using reverse gear

: Memory button M ; Button for the exterior mirror setting = Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror ? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror X Start the engine. X Press button=.

108 Mirrors Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position.

X Use button; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another posi- tion, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving position.

Saving using the memory button You can store the parking position of the exte- rior mirror on the front-passenger side using memory buttonM:. The reverse gearmust not be engaged. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X Press button=. X Use button; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb.

X Press memory button M: and one of the arrows on button; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps.

X After successfully storing, reset the driving position of the exterior mirror.

Calling up a stored parking position set- ting X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side using button=.

X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rwhen you use button? to select the exterior mirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you use thememory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING When thememory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu- pants particularly children could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjust- ments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme- diately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING Children could become trapped if they acti- vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni- tion lock.

Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Rposition of the head-up display

Memory function 109

Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Z

X Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 100). X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 105) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 107).

X Pressmemory buttonM and then press one of the memory position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting X Press and hold the relevant memory position button 1, 2 or 3 until the following compo- nents are in the saved position: RSeat RSteering wheel RExterior mirrors RHead-up display i If you release the memory position switch, the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The head-up dis- play continues to be adjusted.

110 Memory function Se at s, st ee rin

g w he el an d m irr or s

Exterior lighting

General notes USA only: if you wish to drive during the daytime without lights, switch off the Daytime Running Lights function via the on-board com- puter (Y page 223).

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: Rlight switch (Y page 111) Rcombination switch (Y page 112) Ron-board computer (Y page 223)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting 4 Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to the position. The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in positionu

Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to, the low- beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light- ing at all times. is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light, but not in the event of poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray. RWith the SmartKey in position1 in the igni- tion lock, the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the bright- ness of the ambient light. RUSA only: if you have switched on the Daytime Running Lights function via the on- board computer, and the engine is running, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the ambient light. RCanada only: depending on the ambient light, the daytime running lamps or the parking and low-beam headlamps are switched on/off automatically when the engine is running.

X To switch on the automatic headlamps: turn the light switch to the position.

USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. Here, the Daytime Running Lights function must be switched on via the on-board computer (Y page 223). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to the T or L position, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime run- ning lamps. Canada only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.

Exterior lighting 111

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a driving position to P, the daytime running lamps and low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta- tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to the T position, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to theL position, themanual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.

Low-beam headlamps G WARNING When the light switch is set to, the low- beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L position. The green L indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the rear fog lamp.

X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L or position.

X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp on the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps ! If the battery charge is very low, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and in awell lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T parking lamps over a period of several hours. If pos- sible, switch on the right-hand X or left- hand W standing lamps.

X To switch on the parking lamps: turn the light switch to the T position. The green T indicator lamp on the instru- ment cluster lights up.

Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: turn the SmartKey to positionu in the ignition lock or remove the SmartKey.

X Turn the light switch to the W (left-hand side of the vehicle) orX (right-hand side of the vehicle) position.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right

112 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

= High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow; or?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.

X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to the L or position.

X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow:. In the position, the high-beam head- lamps are switched on onlywhen it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp on the instru- ment cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its nor- mal position. The blue K indicator lamp on the instru- ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it auto- matically controls activation and deactivation of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 113). X High-beam flasher: pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch the hazard warning lamps on or off: press button:. The turn signal lamps flash when the hazard warning lamps are switched on. If you now

switch on a turn signal lamp using the com- bination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

The hazard warning lamps switch on automati- cally if an air bag is deployed. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function The cornering light function improves the illu- mination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visi- bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Cornering light function with traffic circle function: The cornering light function is activated on both sides before entering a traffic circle through an evaluation of the current GPS position of the vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians crossing the road, for example, are illuminated by your vehicle in good time. Only vehicleswith theCOMANDmultimedia sys- tem have this function.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the head- lamps from high beam to low beam.

Exterior lighting 113

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes

G WARNING Adaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto- matic high-beam headlamps will not be deac- tivated orwill be activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive HighbeamAssist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con- ditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off X To switch on: turn the light switch to the position.

X Press the combination switch forwards beyond the pressure point (Y page 112). The _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor switches on the low-beam headlamps.

If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehi- cle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approx- imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users are detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. TheK indicator lamp on the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approx- imately 16mph (25 km/h) or other road users are detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. TheK indicator lamp on the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi- cator lamp on the multifunction display remains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The K indicator lamp on the instrument cluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp.

114 Exterior lighting Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p Left-hand front reading lamp ; | Automatic interior lighting control = c Front interior lighting ? u Rear interior lighting A p Right-hand front reading lamp

Control panel in the grab handle (rear compartment)

: Reading lamp ; p Switches the reading lamp on/off

Interior lighting control

General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except for when the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

The color and brightness of the ambient lighting are set using the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual).

Automatic interior lighting control X To switch on or off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the over- head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior lighting is switched on for a set time when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual).

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb.

Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it Rit is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Use bulbs only in closed lamps that have been designed for this purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified volt- age. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth.

Replacing bulbs 115

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 116). Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con- sult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs your- self. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required.

Overview of bulb types You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend.

Halogen headlamps : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

Rear lamp cluster : Backup lamp: W 16 W

Replacing front bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)

Low-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Push bulb holder; up and pull out. X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder;. X Insert new bulb into bulb holder;. X Insert bulb holder; into groove with lug at top.

X Push bulb holder; down until it engages audibly.

X Press on housing cover: and turn it clock- wise.

116 Replacing bulbs Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

High-beam headlamps

X Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Push bulb holder; upwards and pull out. X Pull defective bulb out of bulb holder;. X Insert new bulb into bulb holder;. X Insert bulb holder; into groove with lug at top.

X Push bulb holder; down until it engages audibly.

X Press on housing cover: and turn it clock- wise.

Turn signals

X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 117).

X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise using the grip under the headlamp casing and remove it downwards with bulb.

X Turn defective bulb counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb holder:.

X Insert new bulb into bulb holder:.

X Insert bulb holder:, turn it clockwise and lock.

X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 117).

Removing and installing the cover in the front wheel housing You must remove the cover of the front wheel housing before you can change the front turn signal lamp.

X To remove: switch off the lights. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob: 180 outwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover; is released.

X Fold cover; up. X To install: insert cover; into the left, right and two lower catches.

X Turn rotary knob: 180 inwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover; is locked.

Replacing bulbs 117

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Replacing rear bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps)

Opening and closing the side trim pan- els

Example: right-hand side paneling You must open the side trim panel in the cargo compartment before you can replace the bulbs in the tail lamps. X To open: release right or left side trim panel: at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow.

X To close: insert side trim panel:.

Rear lamp cluster

Changing the backup lamp Due to their location, have the bulbs in the backup lamp in the tailgate replaced at a quali- fied specialist workshop. X Switch off the lights. X Open the tailgate.

Example: right-hand side handle X In recess? on the inside of the closing han- dle, pry off and remove the upper section of

handle= with a flat, smooth object, e.g. a screwdriver.

X Pull the lower section of handle: with a strong tug to remove it from the trim and then place it to one side.

X Reach under the right-hand side of trimB and lightly tug along the entire length of the trim in order to unclip it.

X Pull out connectorC of the surround lighting by releasing the latches.

X Vehicleswith EASY-PACK tailgate: pull out the plug connector for the switch at the top right of the trim.

X Vehicles with electric fold-out trailer tow hitch: unlock and pull out the plug connector for the switch at the top left of the trim.

X Place trimB to one side.

X Unclip the remaining part of trimD from the assembly on the corresponding side using a sudden, sharp movement, until bulb holder E is accessible.

118 Replacing bulbs Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

X Pull the defective bulb out of bulb holderE. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holderE. X Position trimD and engage it in place by tapping it with your hand.

X Check that all the metal clips are inserted in the parts that were placed to one side: two clips; in the upper section of handle= and four clipsA in trimB.

X If not, remove the missing metal clips from the metal openings in the tailgate and insert them in the appropriate places.

X Grasp trimB and connect plug connectorC to the surround lighting. i The surround lighting only illuminates when the tailgate has been shut and reopened.

X Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: insert the plug connector for the switch at the top right of the trim.

X Vehicles with electric fold-out trailer tow hitch: insert the plug connector for the switch at the top left of the trim.

X Position trimB and engage it in place by tapping it with your hand, starting from the outside.

X Clip in the lower section of handle: again. X Insert and engage the upper section of handle = into lower section:.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col- lected on thewindshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry.

If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi- dues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becom- ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind- shield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Intermittent wipe, normal 3 Intermittent wipe, frequent 4 Continuous wipe, slow 5 Continuous wipe, fast B Single wipe

Wipe with washer fluid X Switch on the ignition. X Turn the combination switch to the corre- sponding position.

Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the or position, the appropriate wipe frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the position, caus- ing the windshield wiper to wipe more fre- quently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions.

Windshield wipers 119

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

Switching the rear window wiper on/ off

: Switch 2 b Wipes with washer fluid 3 I Switches on intermittent wiping 4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping 5 b Wipes with washer fluid X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X Turn switch: on the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, the symbol appears in the instrument cluster.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/ rear window. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the wind-

shield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Adjusting the wiper blades so that they are vertical On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY- LESSGO start function: X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X Set the windshield wipers to the posi- tion on the combination switch.

X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, turn the SmartKey to positionu in the igni- tion lock and remove SmartKey.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY- LESSGO start function: X Switch off the engine. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wiper to the position on the combination switch.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms are vertical to the hood, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

Removing the wiper blades

120 Windshield wipers Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

X Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow: away from thewiper arm as far as it will go.

X Slide the catch; in the direction of arrow= until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click.

X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow? away from the wiper arm.

Installing the wiper blades

X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow:.

X Slide the catch; in the direction of arrow= until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

X Remove the protective film: from the ser- vice indicator on the tip of the wiper blade.

If the color of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

i The duration of the color change varies depending on the usage conditions.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing a wiper blade

X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEY- LESSGO start function: X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This is the same as: "Key removed".

Windshield wipers 121

Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Z

X Foldwiper arm? away from the rearwindow. X Press both release clips;. X Fold wiper blade: in the direction of arrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction of arrowA.

Installing a wiper blade

X Position new wiper blade: with recessB on lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction of arrow = onto the wiper arm until retaining clips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seated cor- rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win- dow.

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The windshield wipers are jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move- ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in positionu. This means: "Key removed".

X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers fail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

The windshield washer fluid from the spray noz- zles no longer hits the center of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

122 Windshield wipers Li gh ts an d w in ds hi el d w ip er s

Overview of climate control systems

General notes Observe the settings recommended on the fol- lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica- tion function Ractivate the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior climate. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. Optimum climate control is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. If you start the engine using your smartphone, the last selected climate control setting is reac- tivated (Y page 134).

The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental condi- tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Book- let.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 91). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired inte- rior temperature will be reached more quickly.

i It is possible that the blower may be activa- ted automatically 60minutes after the Smart- Key has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30minutes to dry the automatic climate control.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Example: control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 126) ; Sets the air distribution (Y page 126) = Sets the airflow (Y page 126)

Switches off climate control (Y page 124)

Overview of climate control systems 123

Cl im at e co nt ro l

? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 125) A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 126) B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 272) C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 127) D Activates or deactivates synchronization (Y page 126) E Switches air-recirculation mode manually on/off (Y page 128) F Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 125) G Sets the temperature, right (Y page 126)

Optimum use of automatic climate control

Optimum use of the automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommenda- tions on optimum use of dual-zone climate con- trol. X Activate climate control using the rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with dehumidification" function is activated in automatic mode.

X Set the temperature to 72 (22 ).

i Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func- tion briefly until the windshield is clear again.

i Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139). If you have selected drive program E: Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and heat output is reduced as a result Rthe rear window defroster running time is reduced

If you have selected drive program C, S or S+, the current climate settings are maintained.

ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capa- city. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 137).

Operating the climate control sys- tems

Activating/deactivating climate con- trol

General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly Switch on climate control primarily using the rocker switch (Y page 125).

Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using rocker switchH.

X To switch off:set the airflow to level 0 using rocker switchH.

i 3-zone automatic climate control: when cli- mate control is switched off, "OFF" appears in the rear-compartment display.

124 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivating X Press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The indicator lampabove the rocker switch remains off. The cooling with air dehumidification function cannot be acti- vated via the multimedia system any longer (Y page 273).

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal- function. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notes In automaticmode, the set temperature ismain- tained automatically at a constant level. The systemautomatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis- tribution. During automatic controlling, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated.

Automatic control X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X To activate: press the rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up.

X Set the desired temperature using thew rocker switch on the front control unit.

X To switch to manual operation: press the H rocker switch up or down.

or X Press the_ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch goes out.

In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually, the indicator lamp above the rocker switch goes out. The function which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automati- cally. When the manually set function switches back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp above rocker switch lights up again.

Operating the climate control systems 125

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Adjusting the climate mode settings In automatic mode you can select the following airflow settings for the driver's and front- passenger areas: FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free setting X To set: set the climate mode using the mul- timedia system (Y page 272).

Setting the temperature Dual-zone automatic climate control: different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch w up or down. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 (22 ).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air

vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents a Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents _ Directs air through the defroster, center,

side and footwell vents b Directs air through the defroster, center

and side air vents W Sets the air distribution to automatic

Setting X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 132).

X Press the_ rocker switch up or down. The various air distribution settings appear in the multimedia system.

Setting the airflow X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X To increase or reduce: press rocker switch H up or down.

Activating or deactivating the syn- chronization function

General notes Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature set- ting is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Activating/deactivating X Press rocker switch0 up or down. The indicator lamp above rocker switch0 lights up or goes out.

or X Activate or deactivate the "Synchronization" function using the multimedia system (Y page 126).

The synchronization function deactivates if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed.

Defrosting the windshield

General notes You can use this function to defrost the wind- shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front side windows on the inside. Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again.

Switching the "Windshield defrosting" function on or off X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X To switch on:press rocker switch on the front control unit up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up. The current climate control settings are deactivated.

126 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumid- ification" function is activated. In this case, the indicator lamp above the rocker switch remains switched off.

X To switchoff: press rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch goes out. The previously selected set- tings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion" function with the rocker switch.

X Switch on automatic mode using the rocker switch.

X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" function using the rocker switch.

i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside X Activate the windshield wipers. X Switch on automatic mode using the rocker switch. i If you clean the windows regularly, they do not fog up so quickly.

Rear window defroster

General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X Press rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above rocker switch lights up or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The rear window defroster has deactiva- ted prematurely or can- not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged. X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

General notes You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are enter- ing the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.

If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog- ging up.

Operating the climate control systems 127

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X To activate: press rocker switchg up or down. The indicator lamp above rocker switchg lights up.

Air-recirculation mode switches on automati- cally: Rat high outside temperatures Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system only)

The indicator lamp above theg rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press theg rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above theg rocker switch goes out.

Air-recirculation mode deactivates automati- cally: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 (5 ) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 (5 ) if the "Cooling with dehumidification" function is activated

Perfume atomizer

Operating the perfume atomizer

G WARNING If children open the vial, they could drink the perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle. If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean water. If you continue to experience difficul- ties, consult a doctor.

H Environmental note Full vials must not be dis- posed of with household waste. They must be collec- ted separately and recycled to protect the environment.

Dispose of full vials in an environmentally responsible manner and take them to a harmful substance collec- tion point.

: Vial lid ; Vial The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving comfort. Via the multimedia system you can: Rswitch the perfume atomizer on/off (Y page 272) Rregulate the perfume intensity (Y page 272) The following conditions can affect your percep- tion of the perfume intensity: Roperating mode of the climate control system Rinterior temperature Rtime of year or day Rair humidity Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fati- gue or hunger

The perfume atomizer is active only when the glove box is closed. The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-fil- led vial. You can also choose from a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you can fill yourself. If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the separate information sheet attached to the vial.

128 Operating the climate control systems Cl im at e co nt ro l

! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufactur- ers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use. X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove box (Y page 279).

X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the perfume vial.

X To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself.

X Fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the desired liquid per- fume.

X Screw the lid back on to the vial.

! Only refill the vial when you are outside the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip into the interior and contaminate it.

Always refill the empty refillable vial with the same perfume. Otherwise, you might not ach- ieve optimum results from the perfume atom- izer.

Problems with the perfume atomizer

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The vehicle interior is not perfumed although the perfume atomizer is acti- vated.

The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will go. X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go.

The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently. X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial. X Use a new pre-filled vial. X Refillable vials: fill the perfume vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the same perfume.

The perfume atomizer is faulty. X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Ionization Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate. The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle inte- rior. You can switch ionization on or off using the multimedia system (Y page 273). Ionization can only be operated when the auto- matic climate control is switched on. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open.

Air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-

Air vents 129

Cl im at e co nt ro l

Z

lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.

Setting the air vents Air vents are located: Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash- board Rin the middle of the dashboard Rin the rear center console, depending on the equipment installed

Side air vent (example) : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent, left = Control for left side air vent X To open or close: turn control= to the counter-clockwise or clockwise as far as it will go.

X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent; by control= and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

130 Air vents Cl im at e co nt ro l

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its per- formance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RWhen changing gears manually, change up in good time, before the tachometer needle rea- ches of the way to the red area of the tach- ometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program E.

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on break- ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper- ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. When using floormats or carpets, make sure that they are properly secured so that they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place several floormats or carpets on top of one another.

G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off.

Driving 131

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temper- ature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is sta- tionary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position 3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Start/Stop button

General notes When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different Smart- Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi- ately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the Smart- Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. (Y page 78)

Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the Smart- Key. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will no longer be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 83), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

132 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Key positions with the Start/Stop button

: Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Warning and indicator lamps: see (Y page 256). If Start/Stop button: has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button: once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen in this position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice. The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off again if: Ryou do not start the engine from this position within 15 minutes Ryou press Start/Stop button: once when in this position

The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button: once when in this position

Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. It is possible to switch between Start/Stop but- ton mode and key operation only when the transmission is in positionj.

X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignition lock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but- ton from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Driving 133

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.

General notes Vehicles with a gasoline engine: the catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to positionj (Y page 141). The transmission position indicator on the multifunction display showsj (Y page 142).

i You can start the engine in transmission positionj andi.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X To start a diesel engine: turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). The% preglow indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132) and release it as soon as the engine is running. i Vehicles with a diesel engine: you can start the engine without preglow if the engine is warm.

If the engine will not start: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock after a short waiting period.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132). The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up (Y page 256).

X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132) and release it as soon as the engine is running.

Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button is only available on vehi- cles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function. The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehiclemanually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func- tion. You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 133). Vehicleswith a gasoline engine: the engine starts. Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow is activated and the engine starts.

Starting procedure via smartphone Observe the important safety notes on starting the engine (Y page 133). You can also start your engine via your smart- phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the previously selected climate control setting is activated. In this way you can cool or heat the interior of the vehicle before starting the jour- ney. Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehi- cle is parked. Observe the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smart- phone may be limited to certain countries or regions.

134 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

You can execute amaximum of two consecutive starting attempts via your smartphone. If you press the start/stop button or insert the Smart- Key into the ignition lock, you can carry out two more starting attempts with your smartphone. The engine runs for ten minutes when starting with the smartphone. Once you have started the engine, you can switch the engine off via your smartphone at any time. You can only start the engine via your smart- phone if: Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock Rpark positionj is selected Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated Rthe panic alarm is not activated Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off Rthe hood is closed Rthe doors are closed and locked Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed Also make sure that: Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled Rthe starter battery has been sufficiently charged

G WARNING Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during ser- vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of injury. Always secure the engine against uninten- tional starting before carrying out mainte- nance or repair work.

Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone before carrying out mainte- nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine start via your smartphone, for example, if you: Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps Rdo not lock the doors Ropen a side window Ropen the sliding sunroof

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual. It is possible to shift the transmission from posi- tionj to the desired position only if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the park- ing lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con- verter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.

Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (Y page 156).

Pulling away with a trailer

Driving 135

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the elec- tric parking brake. X Press and hold handle:. The electric parking brake continues to brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling back- wards. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster remains on.

X Depress the accelerator pedal. X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination is held by the driving force of the engine, release lever:. The electric parking brake is released. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

For further information on the electric parking brake, see (Y page 155).

Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no lon- ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.

Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient Rthe transmission is in positioni Rthe electric parking brake is applied RESP is malfunctioning

ECO start/stop function

Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated when- ever you start the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automati- cally by the ECO start/stop function, the ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction dis- play. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is available only in drive programs S, C and E.

Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill with the transmission inh ori, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically.

136 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green Rthe outside temperature and the atmospheric air pressure is within the range that is suitable for the system Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached Rthe battery is sufficiently charged Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged upwhen the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe hood is closed Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened

All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. Automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximumof four times in a row (initial stop, then three subsequent stops).

Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button Ryou switch to drive program S+ RMercedes-AMG vehicles: you permanently activate manual gearshifting (Y page 145) Rin transmission positionh ori, the brake pedal is released and theHOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse geark Ryou move the transmission out of positionj Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv- er's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ates from the set range

Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- shield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too low

Shifting the transmission to positionj does not start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been switched off manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehi- cle stops. The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if: Ryou switch to drive program S+ (Y page 139) Ryou permanently activatemanual gearshifting (Y page 145)

If you have permanently activated manual gear- shifting and then press ECO button:, the ECO start/stop function is switched on.

Driving 137

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

All other models X To deactivate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:. Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehi- cle stops. Selecting drive programS+ deactivates the ECO start/stop function. If you press ECO button:, the ECO start/stop function is activated.

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The engine does not start.

The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 172) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 169).

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 133).

The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the SmartKey back to positionu in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 133). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. The reserve fuel warning lamp is lit and the fuel gauge display is at the reserve level.

The fuel tank is empty. X Refuel the vehicle.

The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 328). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

138 Driving Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 133). If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: The engine is not running smoothly and is misfir- ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop.

The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above 248 (120 ).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 309). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC

General information Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Available drive programs:

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving characteristics

S Sport Sporty driving characteris- tics

C Comfort Comfortable and economi- cal driving characteristics

E Economy Particularly economical driving characteristics

I Individual Individual settings

Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe engine management Rthe transmission management Rthe suspension Rthe steering

Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rclimate control Rthe driver assistance systems Rthe availability of gliding mode Further information for automatic drive program characteristics (Y page 144). Additionally, in drive program I you can config- ure the respective vehicle characteristics using the multimedia system. You can find informa- tion about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Each time you start the engine with the Smart- Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 133).

DYNAMIC SELECT switch 139

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Selecting the drive program

X Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch: forward or back until the desired drive program is selec- ted. The status icon of the selected drive program is shown in the multifunction display. In addition, the current drive programsettings are displayed briefly in themultimedia system display.

You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor- mation on the manual drive program (Y page 145).

Additional settings

: ECO start/stop function (Y page 136) ; ESP (Y page 70) = Suspension (Y page 174) ? Permanent activation ofmanual gearshifting

(Y page 145) When you press buttons:? the correspond- ing setting is selected. The DYNAMIC SELECT switch setting is overwritten. If you switch to drive program I, all stored char- acteristics will be accepted. This is also the case if you have previously pressed one of buttons: -A.

i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func- tion is deactivated at the factory due to the available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any drive program, regardless of the display in the multimedia system display.

All other models Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage- ment) Rthe suspension. Rthe steering. Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control

- the climate control settings - the rear window defroster operation period - the performance of the seat heating

Each time you start the engine with the Smart- Key or the Start/Stop button, drive programC is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 133).

X Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch: forward or back until the desired drive program is selec- ted. The status icon of the selected drive program is shown in the multifunction display. In addition, the current drive programsettings are displayed briefly in themultimedia system display. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func- tion is deactivated at the factory due to the available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any

140 DYNAMIC SELECT switch Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

drive program, regardless of the display in the multimedia system display.

Available drive programs:

I Individual Individual settings

S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving characteristics

S Sport Sporty driving characteris- tics

C Comfort Comfortable and economi- cal driving characteristics

E Economy Particularly economical driving characteristics

Additional information for drive programs (Y page 144). You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor- mation on the manual drive program (Y page 145).

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neu- tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission posi- tionj,k,i orh is shown in the transmis- sion position display on the multifunction dis- play (Y page 142).

Selecting park position ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is coasting, do not shift the automatic trans- mission directly fromh tok, fromk toh or directly toj. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may be damaged.

X Push theDIRECTSELECT lever in the direction of arrowj.

Engaging park position automatically Park positionj is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in positionh ork

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans- mission shifts automatically to transmission positionj if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC

Automatic transmission 141

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

PLUS is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 172) and on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167).

Engaging reverse gear ! Only move the automatic transmission to k when the vehicle is stationary.

X Depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa- tion on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 136).

Shifting to neutral

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.

X If the transmission is in positionh ork: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in positionj: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resist- ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis- sion in positionk orh, the automatic trans- mission shifts toi automatically.

With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv- er's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts toj automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts automatically toj . If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutrali, e.g. when having the vehi- cle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS- GO start function: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Engage neutrali. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position X If the transmission is in positionk ori: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in positionj: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

Transmission position and drive pro- gram display The current transmission position and drive pro- gram appear in the multifunction display.

: Status symbol drive program ; Transmission position = Gear

142 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

The arrows in the transmission position display showhowand intowhich transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the mul- tifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission positionh and drive program E or S.

Transmission positions

B Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into posi- tionj (Y page 141) when the vehi- cle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the park- ing lock in order to secure the vehi- cle. Park positionj is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the Smart- Key Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in positionh or k

In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmis- sion may lock in positionj. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

C Reverse gear You can only shift the transmission into positionk when the vehicle is stationary (Y page 142).

A Neutral Do not shift the transmission toi while driving. Otherwise, the auto- matic transmission could be dam- aged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brake pedal will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to positioni if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in positionk orh, the automatic transmission shifts to i automatically.

! Coasting in neutrali may cause damage to the drive train.

7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts through the individual gears automatically when it is in trans- mission positionh. This automatic gear shift- ing behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the auto- matic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts

Double-clutch function When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function

Automatic transmission 143

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected.

Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Gliding mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Gliding mode is characterized by the following: RThe combustion engine is disconnected from the drive train. RThe engine speed corresponds to the idling speed. RThe multifunction display shows the status icon: for the drive program's status icon.

In drive programs E and C, you can deactivate and activate gliding mode using the ECO button (Y page 137). Gliding mode can be activated under the follow- ing conditions: Rthe speed is within a suitable range. Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. there are no steep up or downhill gradients. Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator pedal.

Gliding mode is deactivated under the following conditions: Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou depress the brake pedal. Ryou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position (Y page 141). Ryou switch to drive program S+ or S (Y page 139).

Ryou activate manual gearshifting (Y page 145). Ryou leave the suitable speed range.

i If you have selected the "Comfort" setting for the drive (engine management) in drive program I, you can also activate glidingmode. You can find information about this in the Dig- ital Operator's Manual.

Towing a trailer X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients.

X Manual shifting: depending on the uphill or downhill gradient, shift into a gear (Y page 145), in which the engine will run the middle of the engine speed range. This also applies if cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

Drive programs

Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe drive (engine and transmission manage- ment) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control: Information about configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found under "DYNAMIC SELECT" in the vehicle's Digital Operator's Manual.

i To permanently select the gears in drive program I using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select theM (manual) setting for the drive.

Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol- lowing: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as

144 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL). Rgliding mode is not available (Mercedes-AMG vehicles). Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.

Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the follow- ing: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving character- istics. Rthe vehicle pulls away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL). Rgliding mode is not available (Mercedes-AMG vehicles). Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available.

Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterized by the follow- ing: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is not available (Mercedes-AMG vehicles).

Drive program E (Economy) Drive program E is characterized by the follow- ing: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle has improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnec- ted from the drive train. The vehicle uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel. Rthe cooling and heating output of the climate control system has been reduced.

Manual gear shifting

General notes You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust be in positionh to do this. Depending on which steering wheel paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shift- ing, you have two options: Rtemporary setting Rpermanent setting If you activate manual gearshifting, the multi- function display will show the current gear instead of transmission positionh. If you deactivate manual gearshifting, the gears will be shifted automatically again.

Automatic transmission 145

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Temporary setting

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to positionh.

X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter: or;. Temporary setting will be active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter; and hold it in place.

or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position.

or X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the drive program.

Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! In manual mode, the automatic transmis- sion does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to positionh.

X Press button:. Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To deactivate: press button:. Indicator lamp; goes out.

Shifting gears

X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. If themaximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission auto- matically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if the permanent setting is activated, the automatic transmis- sion does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. It is essential to ensure pro- tection against reaching the overrevving range in the multifunction display. Always

146 Automatic transmission Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer.

X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter:. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic down shifting occurs when coast- ing. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The rec- ommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear; according to gearshift recommendation: when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Protection against reaching the over- revving range (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! In manual mode, the automatic transmis- sion does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current

gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi- function display. X When message: appears in the multifunc- tion display, pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter.

Kickdown X For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached.

During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel paddle shifters. If you apply full throttle, the automatic trans- mission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This pre- vents the engine from overrevving. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only possible in the temporary setting.

Automatic transmission 147

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The transmission has problems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability is deteriorating. The transmission no lon- ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. X Stop the vehicle. X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to positionh ork. Ifh is selected, the transmission shifts to second gear; ifk is selected, the transmission shifts to reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Transfer case This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans- mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test.

! Since ESP engages automatically, the igni- tion must be switched off (the SmartKey or Start/Stop button must be in positiong or 1) if Rthe electrical parking brake is being tested using a dynamometer Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC)

Otherwise, the brake system can be dam- aged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- sion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with

148 Refueling Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

clean water. Seek medical assistance with- out delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ing. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu- eling process. otherwise electrostatic charge could build up again.

G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasoline with diesel fuel.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by particles from the fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 364).

Refueling

General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 148). If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster8. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap = Tire pressure table ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled

Refueling 149

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESSGO X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This is the same as the key having been removed.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow:. The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the filler neck is designed for refueling at diesel filling pumps.

Closing the fuel filler flap X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap. Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi- cle. If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes- sage appears in the multifunction display (Y page 242).

150 Refueling Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the vehicle.

G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESSGO X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in positionu. This is the same as the key having been removed.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not start.

The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run completely dry. X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 l) of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 132). X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly.

If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds (Y page 132).

X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly.

If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 77).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 79).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only)

General notes To function properly, BlueTEC exhaust gas after- treatment must be operated with the reducing agent DEF.

When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, theCheck Additive See Owner's Manual mes- sage is shown in the multifunction display. If you drive the vehicle faster than 10 mph (16 km/h) after topping up, the Check Additive See Owner's Manualmessage goes out after approximately one minute.

Refueling 151

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, theRemaining Starts: 16 message is shown in the multifunction display. The Remaining Starts: 16 message in the multifunction display indicates how many more times you can start the vehicle. If DEF is not refilled, you will subsequently be unable to start the engine. If the 10 starts display message is shown and a warning tone also sounds, then the DEF system is malfunctioning. Have the DEF system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Add at least 1.3 gal (5.0 l) of DEF. X Switch on the ignition for at least 60 seconds. X Start the engine.

i Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Use the special DEF refill bottle when adding DEF betweenmaintenance intervals. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center with any questions or, if necessary, contact Roadside Assistance (Y page 29). If the outside temperature is below12 (11) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is frozen and there is an active warning indicator, it may not be possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has become fluid again. It will then be possible to add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information about BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Important safety notes DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Rnot poisonous Rcolorless and odorless Rnot flammable When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experi- ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible. Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas.

DEF must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and must not be swallowed. Keep DEF away from children. If you or other persons come into contact with DEF, observe the following: RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with soap and water. RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RChange out of clothing contaminated with DEF immediately.

! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas after- treatment system.

! The vehicle must be parked on level ground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a level surface. This avoids false level readings. Filling the tank is not permitted if the vehicle is not parked on a level surface. There is a danger of overfilling, which could result in damage to components of the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment.

! Rinse surfaces that have come into contact with DEF immediately with water or remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If the DEF has already crystallized, use a sponge and cold water to clean it. DEF residues crys- tallize after time and contaminate the affec- ted surfaces.

! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to the fuel tank, this can lead to engine damage.

Have the DEF tank refilled at a qualified special- ist workshop. However, you can also refill the DEF tank: Rat a gas station with a DEF filling pump Rwith DEF refill bottles Rwith a DEF refill canister When the pump nozzle switches off automati- cally during filling at a filling pump, the DEF tank has been completely filled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEF may leak out.

152 Refueling Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

To avoid transporting already opened refill con- tainers in the vehicle, completely empty refill bottles or canisters when filling the DEF tank, if possible. For further information on DEF, see (Y page 367).

Opening/closing the DEF filler cap

X To open:switch the ignition off. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow:. The fuel filler flap swings up.

X Turn blue DEF filler cap; counter-clockwise and remove it. DEF filler cap; is secured with a plastic strip.

X To close: place DEF filler cap; on the filler neck and turn it clockwise.

X To close the fuel filler flap, press it in the direction of arrow:.

X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). The Refill AdBlue See Operators Manual message goes out after approximately one minute.

If the Refill AdBlue See Operators Manualmessage continues to be shown in the mul- tifunction display, you must add more DEF.

i The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked automatically when you unlock or lock the vehicle.

DEF refill canisters ! Do not screw the disposable hose on too tight. The disposable hose could otherwise be damaged and DEF may leak out.

X Unscrew the cap from the opening on top of DEF refill canister;.

X Place disposable hose: on the opening of DEF refill canister; and screw it on clock- wise until hand-tight. Disposable hose: remains closed until you fasten disposable hose: to the DEF filler neck of the vehicle.

X Place disposable hose: on the filler neck on the vehicle and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight. When you feel resistance, dispos- able hose: is sufficiently secured.

X Lift up and tip DEF refill canister;. Filling stops when the DEF tank is completely filled. Do not fill the DEF tank any further. DEF refill canister; can be removed when it has been only partially emptied.

X Turn disposable hose: on the filler neck of the vehicle counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Turn disposable hose: on the opening of DEF refill canister; counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Reseal DEF refill canister; with the cap. DEF refill canisters are available at many gas stations or at a qualified specialist workshop. DEF refill canisters are often sold with a filler hose. A filler hose that does not exactly fit the vehicle's DEF tank offers no protection against

Refueling 153

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

overfilling. DEFmay leak if overfilled. Mercedes- Benz offers a special disposable hose with over- fill protection. You can obtain this from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF is avail- able in a variety of containers and receptacles. Only use the disposable hose with the Mercedes-Benz DEF refill canisters.

DEF refill bottle ! Only screw on the DEF refill bottle hand- tight. Otherwise, the thread of the DEF refill bottle could be damaged and DEF could leak out.

X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill bottle:.

X Place DEF refill bottle: on the filler neck as shown and screw it on clockwise until hand- tight.

X Press DEF refill bottle: towards the filler neck. The DEF tank is filled. This may take up to one minute. WhenDEF refill bottle: is no longer pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be taken off again after being only partially emptied.

X Release DEF refill bottle:. X Turn DEF refill bottle: counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill bot- tle: again.

DEF refill bottles are available at many gas sta- tions or at a qualified specialist workshop. Refill bottles without a threaded cap do not provide overfill protection. DEF may leak if overfilled. Mercedes Benz offers special refill bottles with a threaded seal. These are available at any author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigsmay ignite if they come into contactwith hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- cle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv- etrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in positionj and the SmartKey must be removed from the igni- tion lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Ron uphill or downhill gradients the laden vehi- cle must also be secured at the rear axle, for example with a wheel chock or similar object.

154 Parking Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neu- tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmission X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to positionj. X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to positionu in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated.

X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 133). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corre- sponds to key position1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to key position u, "Key removed".

If you switch the engine off with the transmis- sion in positionk orh the automatic trans- mission shifts toi automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv- er's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts toj automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts toj auto- matically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutrali, for example, when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS- GO start function: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Engage neutrali. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off in an emergency while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three sec- onds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away.

X Shift the transmission to positionj. It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is

Parking 155

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

switched off. The sounds that can be heardwhile this is occurring are normal.

Applying or releasing manually

X To apply: push handle:. When the electric parking brake is applied, the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: pull handle:. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

The electric parking brake can only be released: Rif the SmartKey is in position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button

Applying automatically The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in positionj and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened

To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle:.

The electric parking brake is also engaged auto- matically if: RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta- tionary RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary

In addition, at least one of the following condi- tions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Releasing automatically Your vehicle's electric parking brake is auto- matically released if all of the following condi- tions are met: Rthe seat belt has been fastened. Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in positionh ork and you accelerate. or you shift from transmission positionj to positionh ork. You will need to accelerate more on steeper gradients.

If the transmission is in positionk the tailgate must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou are shifting out of transmission position j or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move.

156 Parking Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emer- gency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle: of the electric parking brake (Y page 156). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle: of the electric parking brake depressed. The longer electric parking brake handle: is depressed, the greater the brak- ing force.

During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Please Release Parking Brake mes- sage appears Rthe redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.

i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist work- shop.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equip- ment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro- hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec- ond.

Drive sensibly save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: X The tires should always be inflated to the rec- ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Main- tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis- play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter- rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can

Driving tips 157

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- dent is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Always have work on the engine carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you use an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes- Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing condi- tions. Your driving style can significantly influ- ence the vehicle's consumption.

: Acceleration ; Coasting = Constant ? Additional range achieved Range? is shownunder Bonus fr. Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve Fuel display message is shown instead of range? in the multifunction display. The8 warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster also lights up (Y page 263).

158 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections corre- spond to the following three categories:

: Acceleration (evaluation of all accel- eration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceler- ation

; Coasting (evaluation of all decelera- tion processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking

= Constant(continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unneces- sary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed

The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particu- larly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of eco- nomical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing condi- tions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction.

In addition to driving style, the actual consump- tion is affected by other factors, such as: Rload RTire pressure RCold start RChoice of route RActive electrical consumers These factors are not included in the ECO dis- play. An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. Achieving a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Robserve the gearshift recommendations Rdrive using drive program E On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On lon- ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (Y page 214). For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 213).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a lower gear in good time. This allows you to take advantage of the engine's braking effect. This helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and wearing them out excessively.

Driving tips 159

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

When you take advantage of engine braking, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war- ranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reac- tion from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt- treated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi- due may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance.

RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead.

Servicing the brakes ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running

Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- formance testsmay only be carried out on a 2- axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please con- sult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: the ESP system operates automatically. If the electric parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer, the engine and ignitionmust be switched off: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position u or1 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly in accordance with the given SmartKey positions. Braking triggered automatically by ESP may cause severe damage to the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functional- ity of your brakes at regular intervals. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 65) and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 66).

160 Driving tips Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends only installing the following brake disks and brake pads/linings: Rbrake disks that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved byMercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/ linings on an axle at the same time. Always install new brake pads/linings when replacing brake disks. The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and threaded connection is matched. The use of brake disks other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the track width and is subject to approval, if appli- cable. Shock-type loads when handling the brake discs, such as when changing wheels, can lead to a reduction in comfort when driving with light- weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads on the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the brake plate. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre- sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.

Driving on wet roads

Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydro- planing occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds Rthe tires have adequate tread depth For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed Ravoid ruts

Ravoid sudden steering movements Rbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in the opposite direction createwaves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. Failure to observe these notes may result in damage to the engine, electrical systems and transmission.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rin the case of standing water, the water level may be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body Ryou should drive no faster than walking pace

Winter driving

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur- faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and

Driving tips 161

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con- trol or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to positioni. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are dis- played after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road condi- tions when temperatures are around freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 338). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 338). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec- tion (Y page 338).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno- vative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi- nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile- stone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in onewell thought out system for the safety of the vehi- cle occupants and that of other road users. Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 64).

Cruise control

General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower

gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake sys- tem and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes Cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control can- not take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- erating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed ; Activates or reduces speed

162 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

= Deactivates cruise control ? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. The symbol appears on the multifunction display. Speedometer with segments: when cruise control is activated, the segments from the stored speed to the end of the scale light up.

Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driv- ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto- matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by auto- matically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed

G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.

Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X Press the cruise control lever up: for a higher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- ments (10km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up: or down; beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler- ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise con- trol: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forward =.

or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h) RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Ryou shift the transmission to positioni while driving

If cruise control is deactivated, a warning tone sounds. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in themultifunction display for approx- imately five seconds. The message on the mul- tifunction display disappears and the segments on the speedometer go out.

i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared.

Driving systems 163

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto- matically helps you maintain the distance from the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detec- ted with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wear- ing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermit- tent warning tone will then sound and the dis- tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- ment cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the respon- sible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an auto- motive radar system only. Removal, tamper- ing, or altering of the device will void any war- ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- tify other road users and complex traffic sit- uations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident.

164 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat- ically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- erating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi- cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi- cles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- ple in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.

This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi- cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun- tries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi- cles driving on the right (in countries where they drive on the left)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed ; Activates or reduces speed = Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS ? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speed A Sets a specified minimum distance When you activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the stored speed appears in the multifunction display for five seconds. Speedometer with segments: when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the segments from the stored speed to the end of the scale or to a permanently set speed limit light up.

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditions To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following con- ditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes of driving before DISTRONIC PLUS is ready for use. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP must be activated, but not intervening at present.

Driving systems 165

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in positionh. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift the transmission from positionj toh or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed. Rthe vehicle must not slide.

Activating X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you? or push it up: or down;. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspendedmes- sage appears on the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you? or push it up: or down;. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- ates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- tions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-

erwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previ- ously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you?.

or X Accelerate briefly. The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the stored speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ- ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle in front, the system operates like a cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving slower, your vehicle brakes. In this way, the specified minimum distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is driving faster, your vehicle accelerates to the stored speed.

Selects the drive program DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or S+ driving pro- gram (Y page 144). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then notice- ablymore dynamic. If you have selected theC or E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop- and-start traffic.

Changing lanes DISTRONIC PLUS aids you when switching to the overtaking lane, if: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not currently detect a danger of a collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance

166 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmon- itors the left lane (on left-hand-drive vehicles) or the right lane (on right-hand-drive vehicles).

Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- cle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 169). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has stopped, it will cause your vehicle to brake and come to a halt. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta- tionary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi- cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans- mission is shifted automatically to positionj, if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is insufficient. If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may also be shifted to positionj automatically.

Setting a speed X Push the cruise control lever up: for a higher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- ments (1 km/h increments): briefly push the cruise control lever up: or down; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down; the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly push the cruise control lever up: or down; beyond the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up: or down;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed back to the last speed stored after you have finished over- taking.

Setting a specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this func- tion, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS maintains to the vehicle in front, depending on the driving speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 168). Make sure that you maintain the minimum dis- tance to the vehicle in front as required by law.

Driving systems 167

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if nec- essary.

X To increase: turn control; in direction=. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instru- ment cluster

Displays in the speedometer

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, the segments between the speed of the vehicle in front: and stored speed; light up. Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package: the segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane. For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Displays in the assistance graphic

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deac- tivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa- ted

: DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated)

; Vehicle in front, if detected = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle X To call up the assistance graphic:select the Assistance Graphic function using the on- board computer (Y page 219). Themultifunction display will show the stored speed for about five seconds when you acti- vate DISTRONIC PLUS.

168 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly push the cruise control lever forward:.

or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message will appear in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically securedwith the elec- tric parking brake RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Ryou shift the transmission to positionj,k ori Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle slips RYou activate Active Parking Assist If, under these circumstances, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, awarning tone sounds. TheDISTRONIC PLUS Off message then appears on the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the road because of its narrow width. The dis- tance to the vehicle in front will be too short. RObstacles and stationary vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta- cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUSmaymis- takenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintention- ally.

In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

Driving systems 169

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot helps you keep the vehicle in the center of the lane by means of moderate steer- ing interventions in a speed range from 0125 mph (0200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera:, at the top of the windshield. In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when you are following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h), Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in front if clear lane markings are not present. If these conditions are not present, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assis- tance. DISTRONIC PLUSmust be active in order for the function to be available.

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, steering inter- vention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the

vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The systemmay be impaired ormay not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- ity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov- ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- ted Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway

The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lane Ryou switch on the turn signal Ryou take your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated again automatically after a lane change is com- pleted. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not pro- vide any support: Ron very sharp corners Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the systemwill first alert youwith

170 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

X Press button;. Indicator lamp: lights up. The DTR+:Steering Assist. On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa- ted but is not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol: appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol: is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button;. Indicator lamp: goes out. The DTR+:Steering Assist. Offmessage appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat- ically in certain situations.

Driving systems 171

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 172).

Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe transmission is in positionh,k ori. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions are met.

X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until: appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal.

If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou depress the accelerator and the trans- mission is in positionh ork Rthe transmission is in positionj Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer- tain amount of pressure until display disappears from the multifunction display Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric park- ing brake Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. When the HOLD function is activated, the trans- mission is shifted automatically to positionj if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is insufficient. If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may also be shifted to positionj automatically.

AIR BODY CONTROL

General notes AIRBODYCONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving com- fort. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clear- ance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel con- sumption. There is also the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. AIR BODY CONTROL consists of level setting, level control and the ADS Adaptive Damping System. The vehicle level can be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139) or the level button (Y page 173). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function.

172 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Important safety notes

G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not lowered.

Vehicle level

Setting the raised vehicle level

It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp; is not lit: X Press button:. Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level. The Vehicle Rising message appears on the multifunction display. i The message disappears after ten seconds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed above 50 mph (80 km/h)

The "Raised level" remains active when you are not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp; is lit: X Press button:. Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the currently selec- ted drive program (Y page 139).

Suspension tuning

General notes The Adaptive Damping System automatically controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or com- fort

Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning In the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive programs, the firmer suspension setting ensures even bet- ter contact with the road. Select thismodewhen employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Select the S or S+ drive program with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139). The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15mm) com- pared to the normal level.

Each time you restart the engine, the vehicle is raised to normal level again and drive programC is activated. For further information about start- ing the engine, see (Y page 133).

Comfort tuning In the "Eco" and "Comfort" drive programs, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select

Driving systems 173

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. X Select the E or C drive program with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139). The vehicle is raised to the normal level.

When driving at speeds above 80 mph (125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically low- ered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C drive pro- grams. When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.

Lowering the rear of the vehicle

Lowering using the button in the left-hand- side cargo compartment trim X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Pull switch: briefly. Indicator lamp; flashes until the vehicle has been lowered. The vehicle is lowered by 1.5 in (40 mm). When the vehicle has been lowered, indicator lamp; remains lit.

Lowering is interrupted if: Ra vehicle door is opened Rbutton: was briefly pulled again Rthe vehicle is moving faster than 1 mph (2 km/h)

The vehicle is automatically set to the level of the most recently selected drive program (Y page 139) if you drive faster than 1 mph (2 km/h).

Raising the rear of the vehicle Raising using the button in the left-hand- side cargo compartment trim X Pull switch: briefly. Indicator lamp; goes out.

The vehicle is raised by 1.5 in (40 mm). i The vehicle is automatically set to the level of the most recently selected drive program (Y page 139) if you drive faster than 1 mph (2 km/h).

X If the vehicle can no longer be raised when stationary: start the engine. The process will then be continued.

If you drive off when the rear of the vehicle has been lowered, the Vehicle RisingPlease Waitmessage may appear on the mul- tifunction display.

AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODYCONTROL (Mercedes-AMG vehi- cles)

General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport+ or Comfort

The suspension setting is adjusted using the corresponding button in the center console.

i The mode can also be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 139). This is possible only if the same mode is selected for the suspension by pressing the button on the center console for AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODY CONTROL and the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. This is the case, for example, when both are set to Com- fort mode.

Each time you start the engine with the Smart- Key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 133).

174 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Sport mode

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button:. Indicator lamp= lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT mes- sage appears on the multifunction display.

Sport + mode The very firm setting of the suspension setting in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driv- ing on race circuits. If indicator lamps; and= are off: X Press button: twice. Indicator lamps; and= light up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT +mes- sage appears on the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp= lights up: X Press button: once. Second indicator lamp; lights up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT +mes- sage appears on the multifunction display.

Comfort mode In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. highways.

X Press button: repeatedly until indicator lamps; and= go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Suspension System COMFORTmes- sage appears on the multifunction display.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures permanent drive for all four wheels. Together with ESP, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC does not take into account Rthe road and weather conditions Rthe traffic situation 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes- Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehi- cle with all wheels in full contact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object.

Driving systems 175

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace- ment for your attention to your immediate sur- roundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/leaving park- ing spaces.

! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain.

! Remove the detachable ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required. PARKTRONIC measures the minimum detection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball cou- pling.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to positionh,k or i

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.

Range of the sensors PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con- sideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- mals or objects. Rabove the detection range, for example over- hanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example)

: Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners) ; Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners) = Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) (center) ? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center) The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 315). Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

176 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel- evant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min- imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle

; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle

= Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instru- ment cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear com- partment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if operational read- iness indicator= lights up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter- mine which warning display is active when the engine is running.

Transmission posi- tion

Warning display

h Front area activated

k,i or the vehicle is rolling back

Rear and front areas activated

j No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi- cle's distance from the obstacle: RFrom the sixth segment, youwill hear an inter- mittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. RFrom the seventh segment, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

d Switch on the dashboard e Switch in the center console : Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC ; Indicator lamp If indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 177

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warn- ing displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indi- cator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warn- ing displays are lit. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 315). X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra- sound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering inter- vention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 175).

Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immedi- ate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, ani- mals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park- ing Assist is also unavailable. For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch installed, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly longer. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the electrical connection is established between

your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area.

G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park- ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta- cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for park- ing, for example: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces

178 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible. RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 177) warning messages during the parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist is then deactivated. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RAlways pay attention to the specified tire pressure for your vehicle. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Ron straight roads, not bends Ron the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement

Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is cal- culated, e.g. overhanging loads, truck over- hangs or loading ramps.

G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these objects

You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident.

If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detection range (Y page 176). Active Parking Assist does not assist you park- ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb Ryou forward-park Active Parking Assist does not assist you park- ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb Rthe system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav- ing blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu- ver into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

: Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is switched on automati- cally when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys- tem independently locates and measures park- ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

Driving systems 179

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi- cle Rat right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the size of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol; as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays park- ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowl- edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press- ing thea button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driv- ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- partment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with.

Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are respon- sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym- bol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to positionk. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in themultifunction display.

X To cancel the procedure:press the% button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press thea button on themultifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes- sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth- erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select D ObserveSurroundings message appears in the multi- function display. X While the vehicle is stationary, shift the trans- mission to positionh. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction.

180 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes- sage appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select R ObserveSurroundings message appears in the multi- function display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Switched Off message appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you depress the accel- erator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applica- tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park- ing space after parking is dependent on vari- ous factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also preselect transmission position h. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensi- ble parking position can no longer be ach- ieved from this position.

Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide. Your vehicle can be maneuvered into a position at a maximum of 45 to the starting position in the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallywhilst the vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time.

X Start the engine. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to positionh ork. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears on the multifunction dis- play.

X To cancel the procedure:press the% button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away.

or X To exit a parking space using Active Park- ing Assist: press thea button on themul- tifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes- sage appears on the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approx- imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park- ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.

X Depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to positionh ork. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and Brake Observe

Driving systems 181

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Surroundingsmessage appears on the mul- tifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi- tion.

X Drive forward and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary.

Once you have exited the parking space com- pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and thePark Assist Switched Offmessage appears on the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful if you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space.

Canceling Active Parking Assist X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

or X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 177). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park- ing Assist is immediately canceled. The ParkAssist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Rtransmission positionj is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon- ger possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP intervenes or fails. In such cases thewarning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis- appears and themultifunction display shows thePark Assist Canceled message. When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself.

If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys- tem. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia system depends on the language setting. The follow- ing are examples of rear view camera displays in the multimedia system.

Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immedi- ate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the tailgate is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker)

182 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win- ter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 316) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, rear bicycle rack). The rear view camera is protected from rain- drops and dust bymeans of a flap.When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the cargo compartment Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 316). For technical reasons, the flapmay remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear view camera

X To activate: make sure that the Activa tion by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see theDigital Operator's Manual).

X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The multi- media systemshows the area behind the vehi- cle with guide lines. The image from the rear view camera is avail- able throughout the maneuvering process.

X To switch the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch:using the controller, select symbol: for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol; for "Coupling up a trailer". The symbol of the selected function is high- lighted.

X To deactivate: shift the transmission to posi- tionj.

or X Drive forwards at a speed greater than 7 mph (12 km/h).

Multimedia display The rear view cameramay show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle

! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom- most guideline.

Driving systems 183

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide lines without steering input, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering input (dynamic)

? Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi- cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle If the transmission is shifted to positionk, guide lines appear in the camera image. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

E Front warning display F Rear warning display G Additional vehicle icon: PARKTRONIC meas-

urement operational readiness indicator Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 177), vehi- cle symbolG appears in themultimedia system display. If the PARKTRONICwarning displays are active or light up, warning displaysE andF are also active or light up correspondingly in the multimedia system display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space without steering input

: White guide line without steering input vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including the exterior mirrors dynamic for current steering input

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi- cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

184 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 183). The lane and the guide lines appear.

X With the help of white guide line:, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

Reverseperpendicular parkingwith steer- ing input

X After driving past the parking space, stop the vehicle safely.

X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 183). The lane and the guide lines appear in the camera image.

X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steer- ing wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide lines; reach parking space marking:. Yellowguide lines;dynamically adapt to the current steering input.

X Maintain the steering input and reverse care- fully.

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space.

: Parking space markings = White guide lines for current steering input White guide lines= should be as close to par- allel with parking space markings: as possi- ble. X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary.

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

A White guide lines no steering input B End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. The red guide line? is then at the end of the parking spaceB. The vehicle is almost par- allel in the parking space.

Driving systems 185

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

"Coupling up a trailer" function

: Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; Trailer drawbar This function is only available on vehicles with a trailer tow hitch. X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height of trailer drawbar; so that it is slightly higher than the ball coupling.

X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar;.

= Trailer drawbar marker assistant ? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-

tion A Ball coupling B Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the ball coupling X Select symbol? using the multimedia sys- tem controller. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec- ted. The distance specifications now only apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer drawbar locating aid= points approximately in the direction of trailer drawbar;.

X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar; rea- ches red guide lineB. The distance between trailer drawbar; and red guide lineB is now approximately 12 in (0.30 m).

X Couple up the trailer (Y page 204).

"Wide-angle" function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays You can also use the rear view camera to select a wide-angle view. When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 177), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the display of the multimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn- ing displays= light up in themultimedia system display in yellow or red respectively.

Object detection The rear view camera helps detect moving and stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle or other obstacle) is detected, this object is marked with a bar. Objects located some dis- tance from the vehicle away are marked with a yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very small, the bar is displayed in red. Object detection only works in wide-angle view. To ensure that you can use the function, it must be switched on in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

186 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

360 camera

General notes The 360 camera is a system consisting of four cameras. The system processes images from the follow- ing cameras: RRear view camera RFront camera RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors The cameras cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, for example when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit. You can show images from the 360 camera in full-screen mode or in seven different split- screen views on the multimedia system. A split- screen view also includes a top view of the vehi- cle. This view is calculated from the data sup- plied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The seven split-screen views are: RTop view and picture from the rear view cam- era (130 viewing angle) RTop view and image from the front camera (130 viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) RTop view and enlarged rear view RTop view and enlarged front view RTop view and trailer view (vehicles with trailer tow hitch) RTop view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view) RTop view and images from the forward-facing side cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift the transmission fromh ork toi, the guide lines are hidden in the multimedia system. When you change between transmission posi- tionsh andk, you see the previously selec- ted front or rear view. Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed: Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is from an object.

Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC is active Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle Rred line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle

Important safety notes The 360camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incor- rectly or not at all. The 360camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safe maneuver- ing and parking. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- ers. The 360 camera will not function or will func- tion in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the tailgate is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered Rif the vehicle components in which the cam- eras are installed are damaged. In this case, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360 camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. The guide lines in themultimedia system display show the distances to your vehicle. The distan- ces only apply to road level. In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer tow hitch.

Driving systems 187

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

The camera in the rear area is protected by means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360 camera is activated. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 316). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the 360 camera has been deactivated. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi- tional attachments (e.g. license plate holder, rear bicycle carrier). On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, depending on technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in: Rinaccuracies in the guide lines Rinaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view)

Activation conditions The image from the 360 camera appears if: Rthe multimedia system is switched on Rthe 360 Camera function is switched on If you are driving faster than at a moderate speed and you turn on the 360 camera, a warn- ing message appears. The warning message disappears if: Ryou are again driving at amoderate speed The 360 camera is then activated Rthe message is confirmed with the% but- ton

Switching the 360 camera on and off using the button

X To switch on: press button:. The following appears depending on whether gearh ork is selected:

Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera

X To switch off: press button:.

Activating the 360 camera using reverse gear The 360 camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

X To show the 360 camera image: engage reverse gear. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera. You cannot stop the 360 camera display if reverse gear is engaged.

Selecting the split-screen view or full screen mode Switching between split screen views: X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide5 the controller.

X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller. Switching to full screen mode: X Turn and press 180 Viewwith the controller. The full screen option is only available in the fol- lowing views: RTop view with picture from the rear view cam- era RTop view with picture from the front camera

Multimedia display

Important safety notes The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations: Runder the front and rear bumpers Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle

188 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Rvery close to the exterior mirrors Rin the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom- most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear view camera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image

= Guide lines for the maximum steering input ? Yellow lanes marking the course the tires

will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including the exterior mirrors dynamic for current steering input

B Vehicle center axis (locating aids) C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi- cle

D Bumper E Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle If the transmission is shifted to positionk, guide lines appear in the camera image. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam- era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle

= Yellow guide lines for vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering input (dynamic)

? Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 189

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam- eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing side camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle)

i You can also select the side camera setting for the rear-facing view.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

: Vehicle center point on the yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; Trailer drawbar = Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Set the height of trailer drawbar; so that it is slightly higher than the ball coupling.

X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailer drawbar;.

For technical reasons, the ball couplingB of the trailer tow hitch on the multimedia system display is either only partially visible or not visi- ble at all. X Select symbol? using the controller. The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec- ted. The distance specifications now only apply to objects that are at the same level as the ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer drawbar locating aidA points approximately in the direction of the trailer drawbar.

190 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X Reverse carefully until the trailer drawbar rea- ches red guide lineC. The distance between the trailer drawbar and red guide lineC is now approximately 12 in (0.30 m).

X Couple up the trailer (Y page 204). The lines are shown at the level of the trailer tow hitch.

180 view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image

; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180 view can also be selected as front view.

Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. If you select the% symbol in the display and confirmwith the controller, the split-screen view appears.

Exiting 360 camera display mode X Shift the transmission to positionj. or X Drive forwards at a speed greater than 6 mph (10 km/h). The 360 camera display is stopped. The view that was active before the 360 camera was displayed appears in the multi- media system display. You can also stop the 360 camera display split-screen view by selecting the% symbol in the display and then confirming with the COMAND controller. You cannot stop the 360 camera display if the transmission positionk is selected.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas- ing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.

Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well- rested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approx- imately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- eration Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h) Rif you are drivingwith DISTRONIC PLUSSteer- ing Assist activated Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed

The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment is deleted and restarted when continuing the journey, if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driv- er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break

Driving systems 191

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Displaying the attention level

In the Assistance menu (Y page 220) of the on- board computer, you can call up the current sta- tus information. X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 219).

The following information appears: Rthe length of the journey since the last break. Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low. Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warn- ing, the System Suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- board computer (Y page 221). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected:

Selection Standard: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Selection Sensitive: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction dis- play in the assistance graphic display. WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-

responds to the last selection activated (stand- ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multi- function display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take aBreak!. In addition to the message shown in the multi- function display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing thea button on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST con- tinues to detect increasing lapses in concentra- tion, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTEN- TION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. Vehicles with COMANDmultimedia system: if a warning appears in themultifunction display, a service station search is performed in the mul- timedia system. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deac- tivated in the COMANDmultimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Traffic Sign Assist

General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are used to determine the current speed limit. Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. There is also no display for changing traffic signs. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also shown.

192 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

The sign indicating the end of a restriction only appears with the restriction in the instrument cluster when: RThe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximumpermitted speed fromany of the avail- able sources, no speed limit appears in the instrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun- tries. In this case, display: appears in the assistance graphic (Y page 219).

Important safety notes Traffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital streetmap of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphic X Call up the assistance graphic display func- tion using the on-board computer (Y page 219). Detected traffic signs appear in the instru- ment cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant

= Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph (80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 mph (60 km/h) with an unknown restriction apply. The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account when observing the maximum per- mitted speed.

Lane Tracking package

General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 193) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 195).

Blind Spot Assist

General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen- sors. A warning lamp lights up in the exterior mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Driving systems 193

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions care- fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam- per with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte- grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.

Monitoring area In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray

Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

At a distance of around1.6 ft (0.5m); from the vehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to= and behind: your vehicle, as shown in the picture. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, such as trucks, for a prolonged time

194 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Warning lamp

: Warning lamp Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond- ing side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- matically adapted to the brightness of the sur- roundings.

Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre- sponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. The red warning lamp flashes on the relevant exterior mirror. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of the red warning lamp on the exte- rior mirror. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 221).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock. The red warning lamps on the exterior mirrors light up until the engine is started.

Display in the assistance graphic

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the mul- tifunction display (Y page 219). Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance graphic changes to green:. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Towing a trailer When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is deac- tivated. The Blind Spot Assist Not Available When Towing a Trailer See Operator's Manual message appears in the multi- function display.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

LaneKeepingAssistmonitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction cam- era: which is attached behind the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally.

Driving systems 195

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

This function is available in the range between 40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- ing Assist.

Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep- ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi- cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay- ing in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi- cle in the lane. The systemmay be impaired ormay not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- ity of the camera

Rthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov- ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- ted Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway

Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist

X To activate: press button;. Indicator lamp: lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist Onmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, there may be a warning. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 219) are shown in green. Lane Keep- ing Assist is ready for use.

X To deactivate: press button;. Indicator lamp: goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane KeepingAssist Off message appears in the multi- function display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Lane Keeping Assist function (Y page 221).

X Select Standard or Adaptive. Standard

196 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

When Standard is selected, no warning vibra- tion occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP.

Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- tion occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when neces- sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark- ing, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system detects solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving Assistance PLUS package

General notes The Driving Assistance PLUS package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 164), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 197) and Active Lane Keep- ing Assist (Y page 200).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. Awarning lamp

lights up in the exterior mirrors and draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-cor- recting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei- ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit- uations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions care- fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an auto- motive radar system only. Removal, tamper- ing, or altering of the device will void any war- ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Driving systems 197

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring area G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient dis- tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

At a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m); from the vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist mon- itors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) next to= and behind: your vehicle, as shown in the picture.

The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when you are driving alongside particularly long vehicles, such as trucks, for a prolonged time.

Warning lamp

: Warning lamp Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at speeds below approximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond- ing side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).

198 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- matically adapted to the brightness of the sur- roundings.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backward appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and redwarning lamp: flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica- ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat- eral collision in the monitoring range, a course- correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you ormakes a course-correcting brake appli- cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp: flashes in the exterior mir- ror and a double warning tone sounds. In addi- tion, a display underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-cor- recting brake application may be interrupted at any time by countersteering slightly or acceler- ating. The course-correcting brake application is avail- able in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Either no braking application, or a course-cor- recting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP or PRE-SAFE Brake. RESP is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 221).

X Switch on the ignition. Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance graphic in the multifunction display;. Above a speed of 20mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use.

Driving systems 199

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera: at the top of the windshield. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unin- tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. This function is available in the range between 40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).

Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recog- nize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings.

In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- minate the intervention in a non-critical driv- ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- ity of the camera Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov- ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- ted Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are highly variable shade conditions on the roadway

If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lanemarkings are detected, no lane-cor- recting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

200 Driving systems Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.

G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli- cation.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display: appears in the multifunction display. The brake application also slightly reduces vehi- cle speed. A lane-correcting brake application can bemade after driving over a lane marking detected as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recog- nized. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, over- taking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected. A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel- erate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- eration. RESP is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in positionh. Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the elec- trical connection to the trailer has been cor- rectly established. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in which you are driving.

Active Lane Keeping Assistmay not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate brake applicationmay be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction. Rswitch on the turn signal. Ryou brake or accelerate significantly. A lane-correcting brake application is interrup- ted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings are no longer detected.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist

X To activate: press button;. Indicator lamp: lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist On message appears on the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, a warning or steering inter- vention may be made. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,

Driving systems 201

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

the lines in the assistance graphic (Y page 219) appear in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use.

X To deactivate: press button;. Indicator lamp: goes out. The Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The LaneKeeping Assist Off message appears on the multifunction display.

Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Active Lane Keeping Assist function (Y page 221).

X Select setting Standard or Adaptive. When Standard is selected, nowarning vibra- tion occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra- tion occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces- sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark- ing, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system detects solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Towing a trailer When you attach a trailer, make sure you have correctly established the electrical connection.

This can be accomplished by checking the trailer lighting.

Towing a trailer

Important safety notes

G WARNING Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch and the rear axle. This applies especially if the ball coupling in question is longer or angled differently. This could seriously impair the driving characteristics and the trailer can come loose. There is a risk of an accident. You should only ever install a ball coupling that has the permissible dimensions and that is designed to meet your trailer-towing requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling or the trailer tow hitch.

You will find the values approved by the manu- facturer on the vehicle identification plates and those for the towing vehicle under "Technical data" (Y page 371).

G WARNING When the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi- cle/trailer combination could even rollover. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle speed and do not countersteer. Apply the brake as necessary.

! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the engine cooling systemmay be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame.

The installation of a trailer tow hitch is only per- missible if a towing weight is specified in your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, then the vehicle is not approved for the towing of a trailer.

202 Towing a trailer Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. Please observe the manufacturer's operating instructions for the trailer coupling if a detach- able trailer coupling is used. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If you do not couple the trailer to the towing vehicle correctly, the trailer could become detached. Make sure that the following values are not exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight Rthe permissible trailer load Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the trailer

The applicable permissible values, which must not be exceeded, can be found: Rin the vehicle documents Ron the type plate for the trailer Ron the vehicle identification plate If the values differ, the lowest value applies. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient- climbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rhas a larger turning circle This could impair the handling characteristics. When towing a trailer, always adjust your speed to the current road and weather conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle/trailer combination.

Notes on towing a trailer

General notes RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in the relevant country.

This lowers the risk of an accident. ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on your vehicle. Further information on availability and on installation is available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitable for installing detachable trailer couplings. RDo not install hired trailer couplings or other detachable trailer couplings on the bumpers of your vehicle. RIf you no longer need the ball coupling, remove it from the ball coupling recess. This will reduce the risk of damage to the ball cou- pling.

When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle for a maxi- mum load; see the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 354). Please note that when towing a trailer, the fol- lowing driving systems have limited availability or are not available at all: RPARKTRONIC (Y page 175) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 193) RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 200) On vehicles without level control, the height of the ball coupling will alter according to the load placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar. You will find permissible trailer loads under "Technical data" (Y page 371).

Driving tips Observe the information on ESP trailer stabili- zation (Y page 73) and on pulling away with a trailer (Y page 135). The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ trailer combinations depends on the type of trailer. Before beginning the journey, check the trailer's documents to see what the maximum permitted speed is. Observe the maximum per- missible speed in the relevant country. For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi- mum permissible rear axle load is increased when towing a trailer. See the "Technical data" section to find out whether this applies to your vehicle (Y page 371). In the event of increased rear axle load, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operat- ing permit. This also applies in countries in

Towing a trailer 203

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

which the maximum permissible speed for vehi- cle/trailer combinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h). When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison to when driving without a trailer and it will con- sume more fuel. Shift to a lower gear on long and steep downhill gradients. This also applies to: Ractivated DISTRONIC PLUS Ractivated cruise control This will use the braking effect of the engine, so that less braking will be required tomaintain the speed. This relieves the load on the brake sys- tem and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than continuously.

Driving tips If the trailer swings from side to side: X Do not accelerate. X Do not counter-steer. X Brake if necessary. RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen- tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capa- bilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine and, conse- quently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa- bility, decreases with increasing altitude.

Installing the ball coupling

G WARNING If the ball coupling is not correctly installed and secured, it could come loose while driving and endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Install and secure the ball coupling as descri- bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's instal- lation instructions. Make sure that the ball

coupling is correctly installed and secured before every journey.

G WARNING If the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident. Install and secure the ball coupling as descri- bed in the ball coupling installation instruc- tions. Make sure that the ball coupling is installed and secured correctly before every journey.

X Pull protective cap: in the direction of the arrow, out of the ball coupling recess.

X Stow protective cap: so that it cannot be thrown around.

X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 278).

Coupling up a trailer ! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with an anti-lock brake system. Doing so will result in a loss of function of the brake systems of both the vehicle and the trailer.

X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake manually.

X Start the engine. X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: select the Comfort drive program.

204 Towing a trailer Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

X Switch off the engine. X Close the doors and tailgate. X Couple up the trailer. X Establish the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.

X Check that the trailer lighting system is work- ing.

X Push the combination switch upwards/down- wards and check whether the corresponding turn signal on the trailer flashes.

A trailer that is connected is recognized only when the electrical connection is established correctly and when the lighting system is work- ing properly. The function of other systems also depends on this, for example: RESP RPARKTRONIC RActive Parking Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RActive Lane Keeping Assist Vehicles with AIR BODYCONTROL: if you couple up a trailer, the vehicle always remains at high- way level. Observe the following note when cou- pling up a trailer: RUnless highway level has been set manually, the vehicle is automatically lowered to high- way level. If a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) has been reached, this may be the case.

These restrictions apply to accessories that are supplied with power via the trailer socket in your vehicle, e.g. a rear bicycle rack. Observe the maximum permissible trailer dimensions (width and length). Most U.S. states and all Canadian provinces require by law: RSafety chains between the towing vehicle and the trailer. The chains should be cross-wound under the trailer drawbar. They must be fas- tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to the bumper or the axle. Leave enough play in the chains to make tight cornering possible. RA separate brake system for certain types of trailer. RSafety switch for braked trailers. Check the specific legal requirements applicable to your state. If the trailer becomes detached from the tow- ing vehicle, the safety feature applies the trailer brakes.

Towing a trailer There are several legal requirements for towing a trailer, e.g. the maximum permissible speed. Make sure that your car/trailer combination complies with the local regulations: Rin your place of residence Rat your destination The police and local authorities can provide reli- able information. To accumulate driving experience and accustom yourself to the new handling characteristics, practice the following at a location where there is no traffic: RCornering RStopping RBacking up Check the following before the journey: RTrailer tow hitch RSafety switch for braked trailers RSafety chains RElectrical connections RLighting system RWheels and tires RLoad securing Adjust the exterior mirrors so that you have a clear view of the rear section of the trailer. If the trailer is equipped with electronically con- trolled brakes, pull away carefully in the car/ trailer combination. Brake manually using the brake controller and check whether the brakes function correctly. Regularly check that the load is secure. When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling characteristics will be different in comparison with when driving without a trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: Ris heavier Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradient- climbing capability Rhas an increased braking distance Ris affected more by strong crosswinds Rdemands more sensitive steering Rhas a larger turning circle Avoid sudden steering movements. Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly.

Towing a trailer 205

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

When overtaking, pay particular attention to the extended length of your vehicle/trailer combi- nation. Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer combi- nation, you require additional road space when overtaking before you can change back to the original lane. If the automatic transmission repeatedly shifts between gears on uphill or downhill gradients, shift to a lower gear. Driving in a lower gear and at a reduced speed decreases the risk of engine damage. If the coolant temperature increases signifi- cantly when climate control is switched on, switch climate control off. Coolant heat can also be dissipated by opening the windows and switching the ventilation blower and the interior temperature to the high- est level.

Decoupling a trailer

G WARNING If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun brake engaged, you could trap your hand between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. There is a risk of injury. Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake is engaged.

G WARNING Vehicles with level control: The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon- nect the trailer cable. This could result in your limbs or those of other people that are between the vehicle body and tires or under- neath the vehicle being trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the immediate vicinity of the wheel housings or under the vehicle when you disconnect the trailer cable.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged by the rebounding of the overrun brake.

X Apply the vehicle's parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to positionj.

X Close all doors and the tailgate. X Switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle and trailer against rolling away.

X Remove the trailer cable. X Remove the safety chains, if there are any. X Uncouple the trailer.

Removing the ball coupling X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the protective cap into the ball coupling recess.

X Make sure that the protective cap is firmly in place.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 278). Information on cleaning and care of the trailer tow hitch (Y page 316).

Trailer power supply ! Accessories with a maximum power con- sumption of 180 W can be connected to the permanent power supply. Youmust not charge a trailer battery using the power supply.

The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at the factory with a permanent power supply. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. A qualified specialist workshop can provide more information about installing the trailer electrics.

Permissible trailer loads and trailer drawbar noseweights

Weight specifications The gross trailer weight is calculated as the weight of the trailer plus the weight of the load and the trailer's equipment.

206 Towing a trailer Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

You will find permissible trailer loads under "Technical data" (Y page 371).

Loading a trailer RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that nei- ther the permissible gross trailer weight nor the permissible gross vehicle weight are exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi- cle. You can find themaximum permissible values on the type plates of your vehicle and the trailer. When calculating how much weight the vehicle and trailer may carry, pay atten- tion to the respective lowest values. RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball coupling must be added to the rear axle load to avoid exceeding the permissible gross axle weight. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi- cated on the identification plate on the B-pil- lar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer load where the trailer drawbar noseweight accounts for 8% to 15% of the permissible gross trailer weight. Additional accessories, passengers and load reduce the permissible trailer load and nose- weight that your vehicle can tow.

Checking the vehicle and trailer weight RHave the towing vehicle, including the driver, passengers and load, and completely loaded trailer weighed on a suitable weighing machine. This will allow you to ensure that the weights of the towing vehicle and trailer com- ply with the maximum permissible values. RCheck the gross axleweight rating of the front and rear axles, the gross weight of the trailer and trailer drawbar load.

Towing a trailer 207

Dr iv in g an d pa rk in g

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- functioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The on-board computer only showsmessages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- tion display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. For an overview, see the instrument panel illus- tration (Y page 36).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lighting

The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis- plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using brightness control knob:. X Turn brightness control knob: up or down. If you turn the light switch (Y page 111) to the T, or L position, the brightness will depend upon the brightness of the ambi- ent light.

i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is not possible in daylight.

Speedometer with segments The speedometer is divided into segments depending on the equipment. The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 162): The segments light up from the stored speed to the end of the scale. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 164): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front moving more slowly than the stored speed: The segments between the speed of the vehi- cle in front and the stored speed light up.

208 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road condi- tions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis- play indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multi- function display (Y page 210). Changes in the outside temperature are dis- played after a short delay.

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 (120 ), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in the lower section of the tachometer (Y page 36). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 (120 ).

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: switch on the power supply.

You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel

ROpens a menu list

9

:

Press briefly: RScrolls in lists RSelects a menu or function RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens a track or station list and selects a station, an audio track or a video scene. RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number

9

:

Press and hold: RScrolls quickly through all lists RIn the Radio or Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open

Displays and operation 209

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

a RIn all menus: confirms the selected entry in the list RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources or media RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dial- ing the selected number

RVehicles with multimedia system Audio 20: Switches off voice-operated con- trol for navigation (see the manu- facturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with multimedia system COMAND: Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operat- ing instructions)

% Press briefly: RBack RIn the Radio or Mediamenu: exits the track or station list or list of available radio sources or media RHides display messages RExits the phone book/redial mem- ory

% Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call RExits the phone book/redial mem- ory

6 RMakes or accepts a call RSwitches to the redial memory

W X

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

RVehicles with multimedia system Audio 20: Switches on voice-operated con- trol for navigation (see the manu- facturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with multimedia system COMAND: Switches on the Voice Control Sys- tem (see the separate operating instructions)

Multifunction display

: Drive program (Y page 142) ; Transmission position (Y page 143) = Additional speedometer ? Display A Time B Outside temperature (Y page 209) Display panel? shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. X To open the menu list: press the but- ton on the steering wheel. Display panel? appears in the menu list.

Possible displays in the multifunction dis- play: RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (Y page 147) Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 178) R Cruise control (Y page 162)

210 Displays and operation On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 169) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 113) R ECO start/stop function (Y page 136) R HOLD function (Y page 171)

Head-up display

General notes The head-up display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the dashboard into the driver's field of vision. The head-up display allows the driver to see all of the information without hav- ing to take their eyes off the road. A requirement for the display of the contents is that the following functions are available in the vehicle and are switched on: RCruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RTraffic Sign Assist RNavigation

Important safety notes The head-up display is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. The visibility of the head-up display is influenced by the following conditions: Rthe driver's seat position Rthe positioning of the display image Rthe general ambient light Rsunglasses with polarization filters Rwet roads Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display cover

In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the display may fade. This can be reversed by switching the head-up display off and on again.

i Vehicles with the head-up display are equip- ped with a special windshield. Should repairs be necessary, have thewindshield replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Displays and operation

Switching the head-up display on/off

X Press button:. When the head-up display is switched on, the display appears in the driver's field of vision.

Standard displays in the head-up display

: Navigation messages ; Current speed = Detected traffic signs ? Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set

speed

Displays and operation 211

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

AMG displays in the head-up display

: Protection against reaching the overrevving range

; RACETIMER lap = RACETIMER lap time ? Current speed A Currently selected gear, gearshift options

when shifting manually B Current engine speed

Setting options You can adjust the following settings in the head-up display submenu: Radjust the position of the head-up display on the windshield (Y page 222) Radjust the brightness of the displays in the head-up display (Y page 222) Rselect desired displays in the head-up display (Y page 222) Using the Display Content function, you can, depending on your vehicle's equipment, choose between four standard displays. The selected contents then appear in the head-up display. In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can choose between further AMG displays in addition to the standard displays, depending on your vehicle's equipment. If you select a display with traffic signs, detec- ted traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in the head-up display.

Menus and submenus

Menu overview Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 209).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select the following menu: RTrip menu (Y page 212) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 214) RRadio menu (Y page 216) RMedia menu (Y page 216) RTelephone menu (Y page 218) RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 219) RService menu (Y page 219) RSettings menu (Y page 220) RAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 224)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer- ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom- eter: and odometer; appears.

212 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

: Range of the fuel supply ; Current fuel consumption = Recuperation display X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press9 or: to select the display. Approximate range: that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueledC appears instead of approximate range:. Recuperation display= shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display= depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles.

ECO display X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select ECO display.

If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- matically reset.

For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 158).

Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset"

: Distance ; Driving time = Average speed ? Average fuel consumption X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select From Start orFrom Reset. The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 214). In the following cases, the trip computer is automatically reset From Start: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. When 9,999 hours or 99,999miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset.

Digital speedometer X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

Menus and submenus 213

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select the digital speedometer.

Resetting values X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select the function that you wish to reset.

X Pressa briefly. X Press: to select Yes and pressa to confirm. You can reset the values of the following func- tions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. You can find fur- ther information on navigation instructions in the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel ; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the next destination ; Estimated arrival time = Distance to the next change of direction ? Current road

214 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

: Target of the change of direction ; Distance to the change of direction = Change-of-direction symbol ? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of direction (white) A Possible lane B Lane not recommended (dark gray) On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommendedB: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible laneA: you will only be able to com- plete the next change of direction in this lane. Recommended lane?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that.

Change of direction without lane recom- mendation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

= Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol= for the change of direction and distance graphic;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero.

Change of direction with lane recommen- dation

: Road into which the change of direction leads

; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display

= Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane recommendation

Menus and submenus 215

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Other status indicators of the naviga- tion system

: Additional information Other possible additional information: RNew Route... orCalculating Route... A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. ROff Map Themap for the current vehicle position is not available. RO

You have reached the destination or an inter- mediate destination.

Radio menu

: Frequency band ; Station frequency with memory position

= Name of artist ? Name of track The multifunction display shows station; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is only displayed alongwith station; if this has been stored. You can store radio sta- tions in the multimedia system. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Radio menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. Currently set station; appears in the multi- function display.

X To open the station list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station in the station list: press: or9 briefly.

X To select a station in the station list using rapid scrolling: press and hold: or 9.

X To select the waveband or station mem- ory: pressa briefly.

X Press: or9 to select thewaveband or station memory.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. Further information about radio operation can be found in the multimedia system in the Dig- ital Operator's Manual.

Media menu

Changing the media source You can change the media source and playback mode (audio or video) at any time in the Media menu. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

216 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X To open themedia sources list: pressa briefly. The list shows the following media sources, for example: RCD or DVD (DVD only in the COMAND mul- timedia system) RSD card RMedia Register (only in the COMAND mul- timedia system) RUSB storage device RBluetooth capable audio device

Please observe further information on media support and media operation in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Operating an audio player or audio media

: Media source, e.g. name of USB memory stick

; Current title = Name of artist ? Name of album A Folder name Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X To select an audio player or media:press a briefly. The list containing the media sources appears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond- ing audio player or media.

X Pressa to confirm. X To open the track list:press the: or 9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous track from the track list:press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select a track from the track list using rapid scrolling: press and hold: or9 until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the button, the speed of rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function.

If the corresponding track information is stored on the audio player or media, the multifunction display shows the following: Rtrack number Rthe name of the track Rthe name of the artist Ralbum The track information does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected).

Video DVD operation

X Switch on the multimedia system. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

Menus and submenus 217

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X To select a DVD single drive or disc: press a briefly. The list containing the media sources appears.

X Press: or9 to select the correspond- ing DVD single drive or disc.

X Pressa to confirm. X To open the scene list: press the: or 9 button briefly.

X To select the next or previous scene in the scene list: press the: or9 button briefly.

X To select a scene from the scene list using rapid scrolling: press and hold: or9 until desired scene: is reached.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- facturers operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system. X Establish a Bluetooth connection to themul- timedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

You will see one of the following display mes- sages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a net- work and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.

Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Telephone menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time regardless of the menu selected. X Press the6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a call X Press the~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone book X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the:,9 ora button to switch to the phone book.

X Using: or9, select the names one after the other.

or X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold: or9 for longer than one second. The names are displayed quickly one after the other in the phone book. If you press and hold the: or9 button for longer than five seconds, the name with the next or previous initial letter in the alpha- bet appears. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the6 ora button to start dialing.

or

218 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the6 ora button to display the numbers.

X Press the: or9 button to select the number you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing. or X To exit the telephone book: press the~ or% button briefly.

Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redial memory.

X Press the: or9 button to select the desired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing. or X To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button briefly.

Assistance graphic menu

X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Assistance Graphic menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RDistance display of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 168) RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 193) RDistance warning and the autonomous braking function COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 67) RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 73) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 193) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 197) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 192) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 195) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 200) RRear window wiper (Y page 120)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment.

Service menu

Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in theService menu: Rcalling up displaymessages inmessagemem- ory (Y page 227) Rrestarting the tire pressure loss warning sys- tem (Canada only) (Y page 343). Rchecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 345). Rcalling up the service due date (Y page 310). Rdisplaying the DEF level and range (Y page 219).

Displaying the DEF level and range X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

Menus and submenus 219

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Press: or9 to select the AdBlue submenu.

X Pressa to confirm your selection. The range and DEF level appear in a bar graph in the multifunction display.

Observe the information and notes on "Refuel- ing" (Y page 151).

Settings menu

Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in theSettings menu: RChanging assistance settings (Y page 220). RChanging head-up display settings (Y page 222). RChanging the light settings (Y page 223). RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 223). RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 223).

Assistance submenu

Deactivating/activating ESP Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP (Y page 70).

G WARNING If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer sta- bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow- ing situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Deactivating/activating ESP in Mercedes- AMG vehicles (Y page 71). For further information about ESP, see (Y page 70). X Start the engine. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select ESP. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again. If the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready to drive, ESP is deactivated.

If the and warning lamps light up continuously, ESP is not available due to amal- function. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 259). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 228).

Activating/deactivating COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press9 or: to select CollisionPrevention. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: pressa again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the symbol appears in the multifunction display in the AssistanceGraphic menu.

For further information about COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67).

220 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE Brake PRESAFE Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select PRE-SAFEBrake. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again. When PRE-SAFE Brake is deactivated, the symbol appears in themultifunction dis- play in the Assistance Graphic menu.

For more information on PRESAFE Brake, see (Y page 73).

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select Blind SpotAssist. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 193). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 197).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select ATTENTIONASSIST. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select Off, Standard or Sensitive.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the AssistanceGraphic menu in the multifunction display.

For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 191).

Setting Lane Keeping Assist X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select Lane KeepingAssist. X Pressa to confirm. The current selection Standard or Adaptive appears.

X To change the setting: pressa again. For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 195). For further information about Active Lane Keep- ing Assist, see (Y page 200).

Menus and submenus 221

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Head-up display submenu

Selecting other displays

: Vehicle speed display ; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction

display = Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist Using the Display Content function, you can choose from up to four display options depend- ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selected contents appear in the Head-up Display. InMercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG- specific contents. If you select a displaywith traffic signs, detected traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in the head-up display. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select Display Content. X Pressa to confirm. A graphic selection list appears.

X Press: or9 to select the desired dis- play.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec- tion.

You can findmore information on the navigation displays in the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual).

Information on displays of Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 192).

Setting the position You can adjust the position of the Head-up Dis- play on the windshield. You can compensate for height differences if the seat positions are changed, for example. X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 211). X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select the Position function.

X Press thea button to save the setting. X Press: or9 to adjust the position to a level from Level +5 (up) to Level -5 (down).

X Press thea or% button to save the setting.

Using the Memory function, you can save and call up the set position of theHead-upDisplay as a single memory preset (Y page 109).

Setting the brightness The brightness of the Head-up Display is auto- matically adjusted to the surrounding ambient light. You can also individually adjust the bright- ness of the Head-up Display. X Switch on the Head-up Display (Y page 211). X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the Head-upDisplay submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Press: or9 to select the Brightness function.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

222 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

X Press the: or9 button to adjust the brightness to a level from Level +5 (bright) toLevel -5 (dark).

X Press thea or% button to save the setting.

Light submenu

Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off This function is not available in Canada. X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 to select the Lights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm. X Using: or9, select the DaytimeRunning Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the multifunction display shows the cone of light and theW symbol in yellow.

X Press thea button to save the setting. Further information on daytime running lampsDaytime Running Lights (Y page 111).

Instrument cluster submenu

Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunc- tion display. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the InstrumentCluster submenu. X Pressa to confirm.

X Press: or9 to select the DisplayUnit Speed-/Odometer function. The current setting km or Miles appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: RDigital speedometer in the Trip menu ROdometer and the trip odometer RTrip computer RCurrent consumption and the range RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu RCruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot RASSYST PLUS service interval display

Switching the additional speedometer on/off If the additional speedometer is switched on, the speed is shown in the status bar in the mul- tifunction display instead of the outside tem- perature. The speed display is inverse to the speedome- ter. X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the InstrumentCluster submenu. X Pressa to confirm. X Using: or9, select the AdditionalSpeedometer [km/h] function. The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but- ton again.

Restoring the factory settings X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Use: or9 to select the FactorySettings submenu.

Menus and submenus 223

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Pressa to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears.

X Press: or9 to select No or Yes. X Pressa to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Lights submenu is only reset when the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Warm-up

: Digital speedometer ; Gear indicator = Charge-air pressure ? Engine oil temperature A Transmission oil temperature X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. Engine and transmission oil tempera- tures: when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temper- atures? andA are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temper- ature? orA in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out- put during this time.

G-Meter

While the vehicle is in motion, the G-Meter shows the forces that are exerted on the driver both laterally and in the direction of travel. The maximum values are indicated in red in the guideline system. X Press on the steering wheel to open the menu list.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until the G- Meter appears. The maximum values of the G-Meter are saved.

X To reset the G-Meter: pressa again. X Using: or9 select Yes on the steer- ing wheel.

X Pressa to confirm. The maximum values of the G-Meter are deleted.

If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the G-Meter will be automati- cally reset.

224 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

SETUP

Overview

: Drive Eco/Comfort/Sport/Sport +/Manual ; Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport + = Steering Comfort/Sport ? ECO Start/Stop Active/Inactive/Off A ESP On/Off or SPORT handling modeSport SETUP shows the following functions and set- tings: Rthe gear indicator Rthe digital speedometer Rthe drive system setting Rthe suspension mode Rthe steering setting Rthe setting of the ECO start/stop function Rthe ESP (Electronic Stability Program) status

Select SETUP X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Lap ; RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. You can start theRACETIMERwhen the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press: or9 repeatedly until the RACETIMER appears.

X To start: press thea button to start the RACETIMER.

Starting a new lap

: Lap ; RACETIMER = Quickest lap time

Menus and submenus 225

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select NewLap. X Pressa to confirm. A maximum of 32 laps may be stored.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press: or9 to select Stop. X Pressa to confirm.

Continuing the RACETIMER

X Press: or9 to select Continue. X Pressa to confirm.

Resetting the RACETIMER

X Press: or9 to select Stop. The RACETIMER is stopped.

X Press: or9 to select Reset. X Pressa to confirm. All laps are deleted.

Lap statistics

: Lap ; Lap time = Average lap speed ? Lap length This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACE- TIMER. X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press the: or9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press the: or9 button to select LapList. X Pressa to confirm. The lap evaluation appears.

X Press the9 or: button to select a dif- ferent lap evaluation. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym- bol:.

226 Menus and submenus On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages

Introduction

General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone. You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 171) RParking (Y page 154)

Hiding display messages X Press thea or% button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message.

High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call up the display messages: X Press the button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press: or9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel. X Press the: or9 button to select the message memory. If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction display. When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears.

X Pressa to confirm. X Press the: or9 button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 227

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

! Currently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) are temporarily not available. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. In addition, the and ! warning lamps light up in the instru- ment cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

! Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

228 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Currently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move- ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 229

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

T! Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP are malfunc- tioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc- tion. In addition, the and ! warning lamps light up in the instru- ment cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release theParking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 156). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 157).

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake SeeOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: X Switch the ignition off. X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

230 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 156). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp con- tinues to flash: X Do not drive on. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 357). X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 231

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 156). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to positionj, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 156).

F(USA

only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake Inoperative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over- voltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

232 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canada only) Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

# Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. USA only: the$ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

G Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Prevention Assist PlusCurrently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Restart the engine.

Display messages 233

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Collision Prevention Assist PlusInoperative COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator'sManual Important functions of PRE-SAFE have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

PRE-SAFE FunctionsCurrently LimitedSee Operator's Manual

PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range Rthe on-board voltage is too low RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP is deactivated When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRESAFE PLUS and PRESAFE Brake are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Restart the engine. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP on again (Y page 71).

PRE-SAFE FunctionsLimited See Operator's Manual PRESAFE PLUS or PRESAFE Brake is unavailable due to a mal- function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

234 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Manual The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: RDirt on sensors RHeavy rain or snow RWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure, e.g. in desert-like areas

At least one driving system or driving safety system is malfunctioning or is temporarily unavailable: RPRE-SAFE PLUS RPRE-SAFE Brake RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and drive safety systems will be available again. The display message dis- appears. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Switch off the engine. X Clean all sensors (Y page 315). X Restart the engine. The display message disappears.

6 SRS Malfunction Service Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 43).

6 Front Left Malfunction ServiceRequired or FrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 235

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

6 Rear Left Malfunction ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 Rear Center Malfunction ServiceRequired

The rear center restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required orRight Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionService Required

The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin- tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

236 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's Manual The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated during the journey, even though: Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta- neously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 51) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi- function display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi- function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu- pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see (Y page 51).

Display messages 237

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled SeeOperator's Manual The front-passenger front air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.

G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter- pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta- neously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 51) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multi- function display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi- function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu- pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

238 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions For further information about theOccupant Classification System, see (Y page 51).

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

b Check Left Low Beam (Example)

The bulb in question is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 116).

i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

b Active HeadlampsInoperative

The active light function is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Malfunction SeeOperators Manual

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Check the fuses (Y page 333). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes. If the display message remains on show: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Auto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

b Switch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to the position.

b Switch On Headlamps

You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off. X Turn the light switch to the L or position.

Display messages 239

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Adaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Availablemessage is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

+ Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 309).

If you have to add coolant frequently: X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked.

? The fan motor is malfunctioning. X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun- tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

240 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay- ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 (120 ). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge. If the temperature increases again: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 (120 ).

# See Operator's Manual

The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay- ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 241

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

# Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay- ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manual display message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running

The battery condition of charge is too low. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Leave the engine running. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

# Start Engine SeeOperator's Manual

The engine is switched off and the condition of charge is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a fewminutes or drive a long distance. The battery is being charged.

4 Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth- erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 308). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 308). If you have to add engine oil frequently: X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes- benz.com.

8 Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

242 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

8 Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Air Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: The engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Check Fuel Filter

Vehicles with a diesel engine: There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Check Additive SeeOwner's Manual The DEF tank is almost empty. X Have the DEF tank filled as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop (Y page 151).

The DEF system is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Remaining Starts:16 The DEF level has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a further 16 times. X Have the DEF tank filled immediately at a qualified specialist work- shop (Y page 151).

i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEF is not added, it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank with approximately 1.3 gal (5.0 l) of DEF (Y page 151).

If the 10 starts display message is shown and a warning tone also sounds, then the DEF system is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 243

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest.

ATTENTION ASSISTInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle Rising

The vehicle is rising to the level you have selected.

Vehicle RisingPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

Stop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIR BODY CONTROL sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODY CONTROL sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIR BODY CONTROL is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steeringmovement is too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi- cle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

244 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Drive More Slowly

You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are: RYou are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level RYou are driving too fast with a trailer or the trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack

X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again (Y page 173).

X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 203).

Compressor Is Cooling

You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs to cool down because of frequent level changes. X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level. X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. X Allow the compressor to cool down. When the compressor has cooled down, the display message dis- appears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level.

Malfunction

AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling char- acteristics may be affected. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG sports suspension based on AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling character- istics may be affected. X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Lane Keeping AssistCurrently Unavailable See Operator'sManual or ActiveLane Keeping AssistCurrently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThere have been no lane markings for an extended period. RThe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping AssistInoperative orActive Lane KeepingAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 245

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavailable See Operator'sManual or ActiveBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistInoperative orActive Blind SpotAssist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open. X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed.

You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering inter- vention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc- tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 178).

Park Assist Inoperative PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty. X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 178).

If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty. X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine. If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (thej symbol does not appear in the multifunction display): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park AssistSwitched Off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically.

246 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavailable See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Off

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 172).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 172).

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 169). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 165).

DISTRONIC PLUS Currently UnavailableSee Operator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Restart the engine.

Display messages 247

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is faulty. The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist RPRE-SAFE Brake RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Suspended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 165).

DTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: RThe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. RVisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. RThere are no lane markings for a longer period. RThe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringAssist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are defective. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inoperative Cruise control is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

248 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Cruise Control- - - mph RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for exam- ple. RESP is deactivated. The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.

or X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 162). or X Reactivate ESP (Y page 220). or X Reactivate ESP in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 71).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto- matically (Y page 162).

Display messages 249

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tire PressureSoon Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed new wheels and tires Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 321).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres- sure is correct (Y page 343).

Check Tire PressureThen Restart RunFlat Indicator Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 343).

Run Flat IndicatorInoperative Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 345). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 345).

250 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 321).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 345). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Malfunction The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle Ryou could lose control of the vehicle Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire

There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 321).

Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavailable Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sensor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several tires. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special- ist workshop.

Display messages 251

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative NoWheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi- tionk orh. X Shift the transmission to positionj ori .

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to shift the transmission to positionh,k ori without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart Engine With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans- mission out of positionj ori into another transmission position. X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine.

Transmission Not inP Risk of VehicleRolling Away The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in positionk,i orh. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle is Stationary The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to positionj.

252 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit Dealer You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission positionh is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans- mission from positionh.

If transmission positionk,i orj is selected: X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Possible Service Required You cannot shift into transmission positionk due to a malfunction. The transmission positionsj,i orh continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Malfunction Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo- nents. A warning tone also sounds. The transmission automatically shifts to positioni. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Stop Vehicle LeaveEngine Running WaitTransmission Cooling

The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Leave the engine running. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

A The tailgate is open.

G WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte- rior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning. X Close the tailgate.

Display messages 253

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

? The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors.

_ Rear Left BackrestNot Latched or RearRight Backrest NotLatched

Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right- hand side. X Push the backrest back until it engages.

_ Rear Center Backrest Not Engaged

Vehicle with through-loading facility in the rear compartment: The center rear seat backrest is not engaged. X Push the backrest back until it engages.

Power Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display.

Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 310).

254 Display messages On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Key Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey.

Take Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. A warning tone sounds X Remove the SmartKey.

Obtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Replace Key Battery

The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 80).

Don't Forget YourKey

The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. A warning tone sounds This display message is displayed for amaximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.

Key Not Detected (white display message)

The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

Key Not Detected (red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen- trally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Locate the SmartKey. X Pressa on the steering wheel to confirm the display message.

Display messages 255

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey mode.

Remove 'Start' Button and Insert Key

The SmartKey is continually undetected. The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving.

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec- onds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47).

N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to six seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47). The warning tone ceases.

256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47). The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.

N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 47). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 257

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Safety systems

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING The brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the# symbol. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

258 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam- ple. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

$J !

N$ (USA only),J (Canada only): the red brakewarning lamp and the yellow ESP and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam- ple. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 259

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP. In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 70).

N The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP is not operational, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

260 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. ESP is deactivated.

G WARNING If ESP is switched off, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP. In exceptional cases, it may be better to deactivate ESP: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 70).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP checked.

M N Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING When SPORT handlingmode is switched on, ESP is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only activate SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri- bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 71).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 261

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F! NF (USA only),! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten- tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 43).

262 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Engine

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. In some states, youmust immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require- ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 151). X Start the engine three to four times after refueling. If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 263

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 309).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 (120 ). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 (120 ). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 309).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

264 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

X At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 ), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action.

Further information on PRESAFE Brake (Y page 73). For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 67).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 265

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

Tires

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow tire pressuremonitorwarning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac- tion. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 321).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 345). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

266 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On

-b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Vehicle

Warning/ indicator lamp

N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 267

On -b oa rd

co m pu te ra

nd di sp la ys

Z

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Opera- tor's Manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights Rstop and yield signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect nav- igation recommendations if the actual street/ traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons ormap display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip- ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How- ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the radiation source and a person's body (not including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and legs).

G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- tronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric- ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect.

268 Function restrictions M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Operating system

Overview

General notes Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-con- trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely.

Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- age to the display.

Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the button on the center console to the right of the controller.

Adjusting the volume X Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the con- troller.

The volume is adjusted: Rfor the currently selected media source Rduring traffic or navigation announcements Rin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or off X Press the thumbwheel to the right of the con- troller.

or X Press the8 button on the multifunction steering wheel. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the8 symbol. If you switch the media source or change the volume, the sound is automatically switched on.

i Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted.

Functions The multimedia system has the following func- tions: RRadio mode RMedia mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system COMAND: navigation via the hard drive Audio 20: navigation via SD card RCommunication functions RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND) RVehicle functions with system settings RFavorites functions

Controller The controller in the center console lets you: Rselect menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned3 Rslid left or right1 Rslid forwards or back4 Rslid diagonally2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back button You can use the% button to exit amenu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. X To exit the menu: briefly press the% button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode.

X To call up the basic display: press the% button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode.

Operating system 269

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

Touchpad

Switching the touchpad on/off Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem SettingsQTouchpadQActivate Touchpad. The touchpad is switched on O or off .

Operating the touchpad

: Touch-sensitive surface ; Favorites button = Calls up quick access for audio ? Back button Navigating in menus and lists can be done via touch-sensitive surface: by swiping with your finger. X To select themenu item: swipe up, down, to the left or right.

X Press the touchpad. X To move the digital map: swipe in all direc- tions.

Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this func- tion: X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up or down with two fingers.

X To increase or reduce the vehicle and sound settings: turn two fingers to the right or left.

X To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

Character entry with handwriting rec- ognition

Entering characters X Use one finger to write characters on the sur- face. The character is entered in the input line. If the character that you have entered can be interpreted in different ways, these character suggestions are displayed.

X If character suggestions are shown, turn and press the controller.

X Resume the character entry on the touchpad.

Handwriting recognition

: Active input line ; Inserts a space = Character entered on the touchpad ? Deletes characters (Example: COMAND) X To display the menu: press the touchpad.

: To exit the menu ; To return to handwriting recognition = To use the phone book or text templates

(COMAND) ? To select the input line or changes the posi-

tion of the cursor A To switch the language B To finish character entry

270 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

X To select the input line: selectp. X Swipe up or down. X To move the cursor within the input line: selectp.

X Swipe to the left or right. X To delete characters: swipe to the left if an input line is selected.

X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad.

Switching the text reader function of the handwriting recognition on/off Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem SettingsQTouchpadQRead Out Handwriting Recognition . The read-aloud function is switched on O or off .

Quick access for audio

Changing the station/music track

Depending on the audio source that is currently activated, you can use this function to select the next station or music track. X Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touch- pad. The current audio source is displayed.

X To select the previous or next station/ music track: glide to the right or left. The selected station/music track is played.

Switching the character entry between touchpad and controller Requirement: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected.

X To switch to the controller: press the con- troller. Character entry using the controller is active.

X To switch to the touchpad: press the touch- pad with your finger. Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is active.

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favorites X To call up: press theg button on the con- troller or on the touchpad.

X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle. The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theg button again.

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite ; Renames a selected favorite = Moves a selected favorite ? Deletes a selected favorite X Press theg button. X Slide6 the controller. The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign. The categories are displayed.

X Select a category. The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite. X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

Operating system 271

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

Adding your own favorite X Select VehicleQClimate Control. X Press and hold theg button until the favorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten.

Climate control settings

General notes You can adjust the climate control settings using the climate control bar or the climate con- trol menu. Important climate control functions can be set in the climate control bar: RTemperature RAirflow RAir distribution The climate control bar is visible in most dis- plays. You can find all available climate control func- tions in the climate control menu. You can use the climate control bar to switch to the climate control menu.

Overview

Climate control bar (COMAND) : Adjusts temperature, air distribution on the

left and airflow, displays the current settings ; Calls up the climate control menu, displays

the current cooling and climate mode set- tings

= Adjusts temperature and air distribution on the right, displays the current settings

There may be fewer settings or none depending on your vehicle's equipment.

Calling up the climate control bar Multimedia system: X Select Vehicle. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated.

Calling up the climate control menu Multimedia system: X Select Vehicle. The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated.

X To select from climate control bar;: turn and press the controller. The menu for selecting the climate control function is activated.

X To select the climate control function: turn and press the controller. The selected climate control function appears.

Settings in the climate menu

Adjusting the climate mode settings The climate mode determines the type of air- flow. The setting is active when the air-condi- tioning system is set to (Y page 125). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 272).

X To select Climate Mode: turn and press the controller.

X To change the setting: turn the controller. X To exit the menu: press the% button. The climate mode bar displays the current air- flow setting: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS. Starting/stopping the perfume atomizer The perfume atomizermakes it possible to scent the air in individual compartments in the vehicle interior. Further information (Y page 128). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 272).

X To select Air Freshener: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press the controller.

272 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

X To set the intensity: turn the controller when the atomizer is switched on.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Switching the ionization on/off The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in the vehicle interior. Further information (Y page 129). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 272).

X To select Ionization: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active.

X To switch the ionization on or off: turn the controller.

X To exit the menu: press the% button.

Settings in the bottom bar of the cli- mate control menu

Switching cooling with air dehumidifica- tion on/off X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 272).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the bottom bar is activated.

X To select O A/C: turn and press the control- ler.

X Switch cooling with air dehumidification on O or off .

i The current status of the cooling function is displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON activated, A/C OFF deactivated.

i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidi- fication function reduces fuel consumption.

Synchronizing the climate control set- tings Use O Sync (synchronization) to select the cli- mate control setting for all zones together O or separately . X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 272).

X Slide6 the controller repeatedly until the bottom bar is activated.

X To select O Sync: turn and press the con- troller.

X Switch the synchronization function on O or off .

For further information on synchronizing climate control settings, see (Y page 126).

Navigation mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you operate information systems and com- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system.

General notes Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation systemdepends onGPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. Audio 20 is equipped with Garmin MAP PILOT (see themanufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: X Select NaviQNavigation. X Select OptionsQRoute Settings. i If route guidance is active, first slide6 the controller and show the menu.

X Select a route type.

Operating system 273

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

Notes for route types: REco Route Calculates an economic route. RDynamic Traffic Route (only available in the USA) Traffic reports on the route for the route guid- ance are taken into account. RCalculate Alternative Routes Different routes are being calculated. Instead of Start, select the Continue menu item.

X To avoid/use route options: select Avoid Options.

X Select a route option. Notes for route options: RUse Toll Roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the USA) Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes. Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated.

Entering an address Multimedia system: X Select NaviQNavigation. X Select DestinationQAddress Entry. i If route guidance is active, first slide6 the controller and show the menu.

Enter an address, e.g. as follows: Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number Rcountry, city or ZIP code Rcity or ZIP code, center Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection X Select City. The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city. TheG symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control- ler.

X Select the location. If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are different ZIP codes available for the location, the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.

X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry: Rkeyword search The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destina- tions. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the route Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue. The route is calculatedwith the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance.

X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Destination.Yes cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destina- tion. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate des- tinations list.

274 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements For telephony via the Bluetooth interface, you require a Bluetooth-capablemobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem SettingsQActivate Bluetooth. X Activate Bluetooth O. Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth and, if necessary, Blue- tooth visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth device names for all of oneman- ufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth profiles, the follow- ing information will be transmitted after you connect: RPhone book RCall lists RMessages

i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be obtained on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multi- media system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (con- nect) it. Depending on themobile phone, author- ization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for yourmobile phone

available. The mobile phone is always connec- ted automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Audio 20: X Select Tel/QConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch. The available mobile phones are displayed.

COMAND: X Select PhoneQConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch. The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym- bol

Explanation

New mobile phone found, not yet authorized.

Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected.

# Mobile phone is authorized and connected.

Connecting a mobile phone Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimedia system.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend- ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two

Operating system 275

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur- er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode): X Select Bluetooth name of the mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi- nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Press to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to themultimedia sys- tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. Multimedia system: X Select Connect Device. X Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notes If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Fur- ther information on media mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). The following external media sources can be used: RApple devices (e.g. iPhone) RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) RCD RDVD (COMAND) RSD cards Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth

Activating media mode Multimedia system: X Select MediaQDevices. The available media sources will be shown.

X Select the media source. Playable files are played.

Inserting and removing an SD card

Important safety notes G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swal- lowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of children. If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten- tion immediately.

! If you are no longer using the SD card, you should remove it and store it outside the vehi- cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD card The SD card slot is located in the stowage com- partment under the armrest. X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot until the SD card engages. The side with the con- tacts must face down.

X Select the media source (Y page 276).

Removing an SD card X Press the SD card. The SD card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card.

Connecting USB devices

276 Operating system M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Connect the USB device to the USB port. X Select the media source (Y page 276).

Operating system 277

M ul tim

ed ia sy st em

Z

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particu- larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tail- gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- den change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touch- ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle iden- tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects.

RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos- sible and as low down in the cargo compart- ment as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RHook in the cargo net when loading. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction. RAlways stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. REnsure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).

278 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove box flap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards until it engages.

Objects in A4 format or an iPad, for example, can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles with a perfume atomizer (Y page 128) the storage space of the glove box is restricted.

The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key (Y page 79). X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90 clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90 counter-clockwise to position1.

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:. The eyeglasses compartment opens down.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the front center console

X Briefly press trim; in the direction of the arrow. Cover: swings up.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press button: at front. The stowage space opens.

Stowage areas 279

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- lowing may be in the stowage space: Ran SD card slot Ra multimedia connector unit with two USB ports, e.g. for iPod, iPhone or MP3 player (see the Digital Operator's Manual) Ra mobile phone bracket Ra small stowage space in the upper front sec- tion

Stowage compartment in the doors

You can store items such as a rolled-up fluores- cent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle docu- ment wallet (front-passenger door) in stowage space: in the doors. In doors; you can store bottles with a capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cover of the stowage compart- ment before folding the rear seat armrest back into the seat backrest.

X To open: fold down the seat armrest. X Press on the front of release catch: and fold the cover of the armrest upwards.

Additional stowage space Depending on the equipment, the following additional stowage areas are available in the vehicle: Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard above the light switch (not suitable for holding thin objects such as shopping tokens) Rthe open stowage compartment in the center console Rstowage net in the front-passenger footwell Rthe map pockets on the back of the driver's and front-passenger seat Rparcel net on the left-hand side in the cargo compartment

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 278).

Ski and snowboard bag

Important safety notes

G WARNING The skibag in conjunction with the lashing straps cannot restrain any objects other than skis.

280 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Vehicle occupants could be struck in the event of sudden braking or an accident, for instance, if you: Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edged objects in the skibag Rdo not secure the skibag with the lashing straps

There is a risk of accident and injury. Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure the skibag with the lashing straps so that it cannot move around.

A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snow- boards can be transported in the ski and snow- board bag.

Securing the ski/snowboard bag in the cargo compartment

X Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 281).

X Slide the ski and snowboard bag between the two outside rear seat backrests. Ensure that the wheels of the ski/snowboard bag are in the cargo compartment.

X Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip: and place the skis or snowboards inside it.

X Close the ski and snowboard bag. X Pull tensioning strap; tight by the loose end until the skis or snowboards are held firmly inside the ski/snowboard bag.

X Engage tensioning strap= in a diagonal pat- tern on hooks? in cargo tie-down ringsA as shown.

EASY-PACKQuickfold rear bench seat

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold for- wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com- partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged.

! When folding the rear seat backrest for- wards, ensure that there are no items lying on the seat cushions. These items could other- wise be damaged or could themselves dam- age the rear seats.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278). The outside and the middle rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the cargo compartment capacity. The division ratio is 40/20/40.

Stowage areas 281

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Both outside seat backrests in the rear com- partment are electrically unlocked with the release handles either in the cargo compart- ment or beside the seat backrests in the rear compartment (vehicleswith EASY-PACK tailgate only). The corresponding rear seat backrests then fold forward automatically.

Folding the rear seat backrests forward

Preparation X Vehicles without memory function: if neces- sary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward.

X Vehicles with memory function: when one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded forward, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. When the engine is running, the driver's seat does not move forward.

X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head restraints.

X Hook seat belt buckle tongue: through seat belt retainer;.

Release handle in the cargo compartment

X Pull the left or right release handle:. The corresponding backrest folds forward.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

Release handle next to the seat backrest The release handle beside the seat backrest is only present in vehicles with an EASY-PACK tail- gate.

X Pull the left or right release handle: beside the seat backrests. The corresponding backrest folds forward.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

Middle rear seat backrest

X Pull release lever; forward. Rear seat backrest: is released.

X Fold rear seat backrest: forward. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam- aged.

282 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Left and right seat backrest: X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary.

X Fold rear seat backrest: back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 101).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

Middle rear seat backrest: X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary.

X Fold seat backrest: back until it engages. Red lock status indicator; is no longer visi- ble.

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 101).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary.

Locking the center rear seat backrest

In order to prevent the cargo compartment from being accessed by unauthorized persons, the center seat backrest can be locked using a catch. The center seat backrest can only be fol- ded forward together with the left seat backrest. X To lock: fold the left and center seat backr- ests forward. Make sure that the center and left seat backrests are engaged and joined together.

X Slide catch: upwards. The release mechanism of the center seat backrest is locked.

X Tounlock: fold the left and center seat backr- ests forward.

X Slide catch: downwards.

Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backrests (cargo position)

Stowage areas 283

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Vehicles with the stowage space package: to enlarge the cargo compartment, you can adjust the rear seat backrests to a 10 degrees steeper angle (cargo position). X Fold the seat backrest forward (Y page 281). X Move handle: in the direction of the arrow. X Push back seat backrest; as far as han- dle: until the backrest engages. The cargo position has been reached.

Securing loads

Cargo tie-down rings Observe the following notes on securing loads: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 278). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection.

: Cargo tie-down rings in the rear-compart- ment footwell (vehicles with cargo net)

: Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compart- ment

Bag hook

G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of lug- gage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load.

: Bag hook

284 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes

G WARNING On its own, the cargo compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the cargo com- partment higher than the lower edge of the side windows. Do not place heavy objects on top of the cargo compartment cover.

The cargo compartment cover is secured behind the rear bench seat backrest.

Extending and retracting the cargo compartment cover

X To extend: pull cargo compartment cover back by grab handle: and clip it into retain- ers; on the left and right.

X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment cover from retainers; on the left and right and guide it forward by grab handle: until it is fully retracted.

Installing/removing the cargo compart- ment cover

X To remove: make sure that cargo compart- ment cover: is rolled up.

X Push in the end cap of cargo compartment cover: in the direction of the arrow on the right-hand side using the grip=.

X Push cargo compartment cover: into oppo- site anchorage;.

X Remove cargo compartment cover: up. X To install: place cargo compartment cover: into anchorage; on the left-hand side.

X Push in the opposite end cap of cargo com- partment cover: in the direction of the arrow and insert the cargo compartment cover: into the right-hand anchorage from above;.

Cargo net

Important safety notes

G WARNING On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo net.

Stowage areas 285

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

It is important to use a cargo net if you load the vehicle with small objects above the seat backr- ests. For safety reasons, always use a cargo net when transporting loads. Damaged cargo nets can no longer fulfill their protective function andmust be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Using the cargo net

Preparing the cargo net

The cargo net can be used in two different posi- tions (behind the B-pillar or the C-pillar): RThe brackets behind B-pillar: are required for the cargo compartment enlargement (Y page 281). The corresponding cargo tie-down rings to tighten the net are located in the footwell of the rear bench seat (Y page 284). RThe brackets behind Cpillar; are required for the cargo compartment behind the rear bench seat. The corresponding cargo tie-down rings to tension the net are located in the cargo com- partment (Y page 284).

The cargo net is located in the stowage space under the cargo compartment floor. X Open both Velcro fasteners and remove the cargo net.

X Unroll and unfold the cargo net. The upper and lower guide rods must engage audibly.

Attaching and tightening the cargo net

Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar X To attach and tighten: insert guide rod: into bracket; and slide forward.

X Attach belt hook? to the cargo tie-down ring and pull down on the loose end of the lashing strap until the cargo net is taut.

X After driving a short distance, check the ten- sion of the cargo net and retighten it if nec- essary.

X To release and detach: pull the belt clamp = up.

X Unhook belt hook? from the cargo tie-down ring.

X Detach guide rod: from bracket;.

Storing the cargo net X Press the red button on the upper and lower guide rods.

X Fold the cargo net and roll it up. X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo net holder.

X Put the cargo net in the stowage space under the cargo compartment floor.

Parcel net

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of

286 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction. RAlways stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. REnsure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment.

Observe the following notes: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 278). RTo avoid damaging the side trim panels in the cargo compartment, maintain a sufficient dis- tance from the side trim panels in the cargo compartment when removing and inserting the cargo compartment floor.

Installing the parcel net

X Open cargo compartment floor; (Y page 288), raise by approximately 45 and remove to the rear.

X Place cargo compartment floor; on a clean surface.

X Stretch parcel net: over cargo compart- ment floor; as shown.

Make sure that: Rparcel net: is aligned with the center of cargo compartment floor; Rrubber band= is below mountings? RtabA is facing forward

X Slide cargo compartment floor; horizon- tally into the cargo compartment until mount- ings? are positioned in guidesE on both sides.

X Raise cargo compartment floor; by approx- imately 45 so that mountings? engage audibly.

Make sure that: Rrubber bandC is below claspB. The rubber band must not block the clasp. Rrubber band= is below baseD. X Fold cargo compartment floor; down and press down until it engages.

Coat hooks on the tailgate

: Coat hook

Cargo compartment plug-in module (telescope bars)

General notes The cargo compartment plug-in module allows you to use your cargo compartment for a variety of purposes.

Stowage areas 287

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

The following accessory parts are located under the cargo compartment floor: Ra telescopic rod Rtwo mounting elements Rtwo brackets

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you drivewhen the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey.

Installation

X Open cargo compartment floor; (Y page 288).

X Attach brackets: in the desired position on the side of cargo compartment floor;.

X Close cargo compartment floor;.

X Turn mounting elements= to =. X Insert mounting elements= into brack- ets:.

X Pull telescopic rod? apart. X Insert telescopic rod? into mounting ele- ments=.

X Turn bothmounting elements= to& until you feel them engage.

Stowage well under the cargo com- partment floor

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you drivewhen the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey.

The following items are located beneath the cargo compartment floor: Rthe folding box Rtire-change tool kit Rthe TIREFIT Rthe EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Opening/closing the cargo compart- ment floor

X To open: open the tailgate. X Holding ribbing;, press handle: down. Handle: folds up.

288 Stowage areas St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

X Fold out hook= on the underside of the cargo compartment floor in the direction of the arrow.

X Attach hook= to the cargo compartment's upper seal?.

X To close: detach hook= from the cargo compartment's upper seal?.

X Fasten hook= to the bracket on the under- side of the cargo compartment floor.

X Fold the cargo compartment floor down. X Press the cargo compartment floor down until it engages.

Locking/unlocking the cargo compart- ment floor

1 Cargo compartment floor unlocked 2 Cargo compartment floor locked The cargo compartment floor can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNING When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving character- istics change. If you exceed themaximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 370).

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you can: Rfully raise the sliding sunroof/panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Ropen the tailgate fully

Stowage areas 289

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if a roof carrier is installed. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear.

Attaching the roof carrier X Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you transport objects in the vehicle interior and these are not adequately secured, they could slip or be flung around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets may not always be able to hold the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particu- larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden changes of direction. RAlways stow objects in such a way that they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. REnsure that closable stowage spaces are shut before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in the cargo compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center con- sole can otherwise be damaged by the con- centrated and reflected sunlight.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 278).

Cup holder in the front center console

X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 279).

X To remove: slide catch= forward and pull out cup holder;.

X To insert: insert cup holder; and slide back catch=.

X To close: push cover: of the stowage com- partment closed.

If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for cleaning. Cleanwith clear, lukewarmwater only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged.

290 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: press the front of cup holder: or;. Cup holder: or; extends automatically.

X To fold out: place a container in the cup holder. The cup holder: or; folds down automat- ically.

X To fold in: remove the container. The cup holder: or; folds in automati- cally.

X To close: slide cup holder: or; back until it engages.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNING If themirror cover of the vanitymirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.

: Mirror light ; Bracket = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light: only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down the sun visor. X Pull sun visor: out of retainer;. X Swing sun visor: to the side. X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.

Rear side window roller sunblinds ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sun- blind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump

Features 291

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

out of the retainers and spring back suddenly when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either close the side window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds.

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab: and hook it onto retainers; at the top of the window.

Ashtray

Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged.

X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 279).

X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its right side=.

X To remove the insert: hold the sides of insert?, push it forward and lift it up; and out.

X To install the insert: press insert? into the holder until it engages.

X To close: close the cover of the ashtray. X Push cover: of the stowage compartment closed.

i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage.

Rear compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover; out by its top edge. X To remove the insert: push ribbing= from the left side and pull insert: upwards.

X To install the insert: install insert: from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.

292 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Cigarette lighter (example) X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 279).

X Press in cigarette lighter;. Cigarette lighter;will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: push cover: of the stowage com- partment closed.

12 V sockets

General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may dis- charge. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the on- board voltage is too low, the power to the sock- ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage com- partment open. This prevents the cover from being blocked.

Socket in the front center console

12 V socket (example) X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 279).

X Lift up the cover of socket;. X To close: push cover: of the stowage com- partment closed.

Socket in the rear compartment center console

X Pull cover; out by its top edge. X Lift up the cover of socket:.

Socket in the cargo compartment

Features 293

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

115 V socket

Important safety notes

G DANGER When a suitable device is connected, the 115 V power socket will be carrying a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the connector cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury. RUse only connector cables that are dry and free of damage. RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. RHave the 115 V power socket checked or replaced immediately at a qualified speci- alizedworkshop if it is damagedor has been pulled out of the trim. RNever plug the connector cable into a 115V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

G DANGER If you reach into the power socket or plug inappropriate devices into the power socket, you could receive an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. Only connect appropriate devices to the power socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V power socket should only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel.

General notes The 115 V power socket provides an alternating voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices

can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops,must not consume more than a maximum of 150 watts altogether. Requirements for operation of these devices: Rthe electronic device that you connect has a suitable connector and conforms to stand- ards specific to the country you are in. Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged correctly into 115 V power socket. Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 watts. Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis- sible voltage range. Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and the cargo compartment are operational.

Using the 115 V power socket

X To switch on: switch the ignition on. X Open flap=. X Insert the plug of the electronic device into 115 V power socket:. Indicator lamp; lights up.

X To switch off: disconnect the plug from 115 V power socket:. Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

294 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Problems with the 115 V power socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The warning lamp on the 115 V power socket is not lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak. X Start the engine. or X Charge the battery (Y page 327). If the indicator lamp still does not light up: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high. X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket. X Let the DC/AC converter cool down. If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the converter: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal power of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 V power socket will not supply it with power. X Connect a suitable electronic device.

mbrace

General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to activate thembrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To register, press the Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, con- tact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Cus- tomer Center Ra service subscription is available Determining the location of the vehicle on amap is only possible if: RGPS reception is available Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center

The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press theW orX button on the multi- function steering wheel.

or X Use the multimedia system volume control.

Features 295

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RInfo call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the sys- tem carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the Info call button does not light up during the system self-diag- nosis RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol- lowing buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - Info call button Rafter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoperative or Service Not Activatedmessage appears in the multifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehi- cle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regula- tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 295). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig- gered. You cannot end an automatically trig- gered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated man- ually. As soon as the emergency call has been initi- ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc- tion display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) RVehicle identification number RInformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initi- ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-

296 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu- pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emer- gency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indi- cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu- ously. The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second;. The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashes until the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:. If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing SOS button;, you do not know if mbrace has successfully made the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means.

Roadside Assistance

X To call: press Roadside Assistance but- ton:. This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus- tomer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, theCall Connected message appears in the multifunction dis- play. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but- ton on the multimedia system, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 300). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech- nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing.

Features 297

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Road- side Assistance call, if: Rthe F indicator lamp for the Roadside Assistance call button is flashing continu- ously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was estab- lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- work is not available, for example. The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display. X To end a call: press the~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call.

Info call button

X To call: press Info call button:. This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus- tomer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Info call button: flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.

If a connection can be made, theCall Connected message appears in the multifunction dis- play. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number

The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but- ton on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser- vice Center and about other products and serv- ices from Mercedes-Benz. You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the Info call button is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was estab- lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- work is not available, for example. The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul- tifunction display. X To end a call: press the~ button on the multifunction steering wheel.

or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call.

Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe~ button on themultifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia system to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted.

298 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

The mobile phone is no longer connected to the multimedia system. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi- gation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1 the controller and confirm with7. The system calculates the route and subse- quently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book.

The destination download function is available if: Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys- tem. Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa- ble and data transfer is possible.

Route Assistance This service is part of thembrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. You can use the Route Assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur- rent position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section.

Search & Send

General notes To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google Maps can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destination address X Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to the e- mail address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on theweb- site. Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the cor- responding field.

X Click "Send". Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website.

Calling up a transmitted destination address X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132). The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1 the controller and confirm with7. The system calculates the route and subse- quently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book.

Features 299

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswith mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa- ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail- able and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- tion Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone, Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num- ber and password.

Vehicle remote closing The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be valet locked remotely. The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- tion Rtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone, Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num- ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report.

X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified.

Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved sup- port for problems with your vehicle. During an

300 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assis- tance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data need to be transferred during an Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. You will see the Roadside Assistance Connected message in the display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be started, the Request forVehicle Diagnostics Received Startvehicle diagnostics? message appears in the display. X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage. X If the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears: please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. The message in the display disappears. The vehicle operating state check begins. You will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Active message. If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health Check is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice connection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent. X Press the OK button to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. You will see the Vehicle Diagnostics:Transferring Data... message. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep- resentative agreed with you, the voice connec- tion is re-established after the transfer is com- plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.

Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer AssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the display shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop. This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 32). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 29).

Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation sys- tem. A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Own- ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Each route can include up to four way points. Once a route has been received by the naviga- tion system, you will see the Do you want tostart route guidance? DestinationReceived destination has been savedin "Previous destinations". message on the multimedia system display. The route is saved. X To start route guidance: select Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the dis- play. If you select No, the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start. Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again.

Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assis- tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call.

Features 301

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was excee- ded Rthe time at which the speed limit was excee- ded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areaswhich the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif- ferent settings are possible for each area. These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an Info call and notify the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo-fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message.

Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec- onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes The HomeLink garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote

control. Please also read the operating instruc- tions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following tele- phone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge)

More information on HomeLink and/or com- patible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 278). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, per- sons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces with- out sufficient ventilation.

302 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Programming

Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 302).

Garage door remote controlA is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con- trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons; to? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp: lights up yellow. Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon as button;,= or? is stored for the first time. If the selected button has already been pro- grammed, indicator lamp: will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: point garage door remote controlA towards but- tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis- tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote control A until indicator lamp: lights up green. When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro- gramming is finished. When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro- gramming was successful. The rolling code must be synchronized (Y page 303).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing

so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote con- trolA and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 302). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwill need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, for example under "Pro- gramming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei- ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programmed button;,= or? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then com- plete.

Notes on programming the remote con- trol Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable

Features 303

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

with Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open- ers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada. Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Release the button. Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con- trolA for two seconds, then release it for two seconds.

X Press buttonB of the remote controlA again and hold for two seconds.

X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green. When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro- gramming is finished. When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro- gramming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote con- trolA and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear- view mirror, take note of the following instruc- tions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote controlA and whether it is supported. The transmitter fre- quency can usually be found on the back of remote controlA for the garage door drive.

The garage door opener is compatible with devices which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote controlA. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles and from but- tons; to?which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 8 inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote controlA is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control A. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote controlA. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal recep- tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X Press button;,= or? which you pro- grammed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indi- cator lamp: lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indi- cator lamp: flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

304 Features St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X Press and hold buttons; and?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green.

X Release buttons; and?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

X Slide the relevant seat back. X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs: onto retainers;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers;. X Remove the floormat.

Features 305

St ow

ag e an d fe at ur es

Z

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement.

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- ple, away from moving parts

Opening the hood

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set inmotion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wip- ers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood. The hood is released.

306 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hood X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

Radiator Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a thermal mat or insect protection cover. Other- wise, the values of the European on-board diag- nostics may be affected. Some of these read- ings are required by law andmust be accurate at all times.

Engine oil

Important safety notes

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- ple, away from moving parts

G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- ponents before starting the engine.

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

General notes Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay be in a different location.

Engine compartment 307

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface Rthe engine should be switched off for approx- imately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem- perature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement

Checking the oil level using the oil dip- stick

Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (exam- ple)

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guide tube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:. X Slowly slide dipstick: into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again after approx- imately three seconds. If the level is between MIN mark= and MAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Use only engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicleswith a service system. A list of the engine oils and oil filters that have been tested and approved in accordance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The following cause engine failure or damage to the exhaust system: RUse of engine oils and oil filters that have not been expressly approved for the service system RReplacement of engine oil and oil filter after the replacement interval specified by the service system has expired RUse of engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.

Add engine oil (example) X Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tighten clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 308).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 367).

Additional service products

Important safety notes

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compart- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.

308 Engine compartment M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- ple, away from moving parts

G WARNING The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure.

G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is over- heated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.

Checking coolant level

Checking the coolant level (example) X Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

or X Press the Start/Stop button twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function (Y page 133).

X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster (Y page 36). The coolant temperature must be below 158 (70 ).

X Turn the SmartKey to positiong in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

or X Press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function (Y page 133).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock- wise and allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank;. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neck whenwarm, there is enough coolant in expan- sion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far as it will go.

For further information on coolant, see (Y page 368).

Engine compartment 309

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Example: adding liquid to the windshield washer system

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab and open.

X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap: onto the filler neck until it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom- mended minimum fluid level of 1.1 US qt (1.0 l), a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to addwasher fluid (Y page 254). Further information on washer fluid (Y page 369).

ASSYST PLUS

Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book- let). Further information can be obtained at a quali- fied specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 307).

The multifunction display shows a service mes- sage for several seconds, for example: RService A in XX Days RService A Due RService A Overdue by XX Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, indicates the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service sched- ule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnect- ing the battery.

or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the ser- vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service message X Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.

Displaying service messages X Switch on the ignition. X Use on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu and confirm with a.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and con- firm witha. The service due date appears in the multi- function display.

310 ASSYST PLUS M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist work- shop. Have service work carried out as described in theMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author- ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.

Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: RRegular city driving with frequent intermedi- ate stops RIf the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances RUse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checkedmore often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroad An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time.

H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsibleman- ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recom- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func- tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat- ically in certain situations.

Care 311

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are closed completely Rthe blower is switched off Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0 Rthe 360 camera or the rear view camera is deactivated

The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- tional opening of the tailgate: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 3 m away from the vehicle.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- tional opening of the tailgate: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in neutral positioni when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ROperating with the SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni- tion lock. Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmis- sion positionh ork, the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park positionj and block the wheels. ROperating with the Start/Stop button: Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low

speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission positionh ork, the automatic transmis- sion will automatically switch to park posi- tionj and block the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in neutral position i: Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop button: X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. Operating with the Start/Stop button only: X Engage park positionj. X Release the brake pedal. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 133).

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop button: X Shift to neutrali. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if neces- sary.

X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

312 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen- tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards the air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint- work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- edly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced imme- diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equip- ment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: RTires RDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. RElectrical components RBattery RConnectors RLamps RSeals RTrim RVentilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.

! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative film. Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)

between the parts of the vehicle covered with the film and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- tional opening of the tailgate: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 3 m away from the vehicle.

! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situa- tions, for example, could lead to the uninten- tional opening of the tailgate: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle.

Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

Care 313

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommen- ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which has been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt has penetrated the paint surface. Also use Paint Cleaner on paint that has become dull. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch- Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint- work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of automatic car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to considerable surface damage or, more spe- cifically, to shiny, spotted areas. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.

Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- edly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced imme- diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period of time directly after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor- rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore, drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a long period of time.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

314 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances pre- vent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to elec- tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes- Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph- ite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield (Y page 120).

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light len- ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light- ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig- nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the side running board ! Do not clean the aluminum inserts of the side running board with alkaline or acidic cleaners, such as wheel cleaner. Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. The aluminum inserts could otherwise be damaged.

Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Care 315

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Cleaning the rear viewcamera and360 camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera or 360 camera with a power washer.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

or X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS- GO start function (Y page 133).

X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the multimedia system (see Digital Operator's Manual).

X To clean the camera: use clean water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens:.

When you switch off the ignition, the camera cover closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touch- ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause

flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

H Environmental note Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an environmentally responsible manner.

! Please note the care instructions in the trailer coupling manufacturer's operating instructions.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomes dirty or corroded. X Remove rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush.

X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush.

X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball coupling.

X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly.

You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.

Interior care

Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam- age to the display.

316 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer- cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deploy- ment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.

! Never attach the following to plastic surfa- ces: Rstickers Rfilms Rperfume oil container or similar You could otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plas- tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- ucts recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec- tor lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recom- mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- ments ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes

or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Trim elements with piano black finish: wipewith a soft, damp cotton cloth. Use clean water.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- ucts recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes ! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example:

Care 317

M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Z

Rdifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.

Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sec- tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec- tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 (80) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

318 Care M ai nt en an ce

an d ca re

Where will I find...?

Reflective safety jacket

Removing/replacing the reflective safety jacket

The reflective safety jackets are located in the safety jacket compartments in the stowage compartments of the front doors. There are also safety jacket compartments in the stowage compartments of the rear doors, in which reflec- tive safety jackets can be stowed. X To remove: pull out safety jacket bag:with the reflective safety jacket by loop;.

X Open safety jacket bag: and pull out the reflective safety jacket.

X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in safety jacket bag:.

X Slide safety jacket bag: along the lower edge of the armrest into the safety jacket compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that loop; hangs out well within reach.

X Observe the legal requirements in each indi- vidual country for the use of safety jackets. i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from its packaging material before sliding it into the safety jacket compartment. The packag- ingmaterial may otherwise cause it to slip out or make removing it difficult.

Information on reflective safety jackets

: Maximum number of washes ; Maximum wash temperature = Do not bleach ? Do not iron A Do not use a laundry dryer B Do not dry-clean C This is a class 2 jacket RThe safety jackets only meet the require- ments defined by the legal standard: - if the correct size is used - if the reflective safety jackets are correctly fastened

RBefore use, ensure that the reflective safety jackets are clean and intact. The special prop- erties may otherwise be compromised. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored in their original packaging in a dry place away from sources of heat and light. RThe maximum number of washes specified is not the only factor influencing the life span of the reflective safety jackets. Their life span also depends on use, care, storage, etc. RThe reflective safety jackets should be dis- posed of and replaced with new ones: - after 15 washes, and/or - if the reflective strips have become scratched, and/or

- if the backing material and/or reflective strips have become soiled and cannot be cleaned off, and/or

- if the fluorescence has faded, for example due to the effects of sunlight

RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an envi- ronmentally responsible manner. To do so, contact your local waste disposal company.

Where will I find...? 319

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Towing eye

Towing eye: is located in the left-hand stow- age well under the cargo compartment floor. X To remove: open the tailgate. X Open the cargo compartment floor (Y page 288).

X Remove towing eye:.

Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit

Removing the TIREFIT kit

The TIREFIT kit s located in the left-hand stow- age compartment. X To remove: open the tailgate. X Open the cargo compartment floor (Y page 288).

X Push retaining clamps: on the cover down so as to release them.

X Fold up cover in the direction of arrow;. X Remove tire inflation compressor= and tire sealant bottle?.

X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 322).

Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit

General notes Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tire changing tools are required and approved to perform awheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench RAlignment bolt

Removing the tire-change tool kit

Example : Ratchet for jack ; Lug wrench = Jack ? Alignment bolt A Socket wrench for ratchet B Folding wheel chock The tire-change tool kit is located in the left- hand stowage well, under the cargo compart- ment floor. X To remove: open the tailgate. X Open the cargo compartment floor (Y page 288).

320 Where will I find...? Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper- ties) (Y page 321) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi- cles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 320) Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and mounting wheels (Y page 357). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESSGO X Open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in position u. This means: "Key removed".

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- tion lock (Y page 133).

X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 134).

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan- gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

Vehicles withMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics)

General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize a MOExtended tire by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bear- ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 351). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- tion with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure losswarningmessage appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions in the display mes- sages (Y page 250). Rcheck the tire for damage Rif driving on, observe the following notes The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi- cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- tance possible depends upon: RVehicle speed RRoad condition ROutside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rthe type and Rthe "MOExtended" marking If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that

Flat tire 321

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tires). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera- tures down to 4 (20 ).

G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor- oughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

! After use, excess tire sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the tire sealant bottle with filler hose in the plastic bag which is con- tained in the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop.

322 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturers safety instruc- tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com- pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit X Donot remove any foreign objectswhich have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa- nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well under- neath the cargo compartment floor (Y page 320).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull connector? with cable and hoseA out of the tire inflation compressor housing.

X Push connector on hoseA into flangeB on tire sealant bottle: until the connector engages.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head down into recess; of the tire inflation compressor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faulty tire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC. X Insert plug? into cigarette lighter socket (Y page 292) or into another 12 V socket in your vehicle (Y page 293).

X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the igni- tion lock (Y page 132).

X Press on and off switch= on the tire inflation compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation com- pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximumof tenminutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres- sure reached" (Y page 324). If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 324). If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible.

Flat tire 323

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose is unscrewed.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx- imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again. After amaximumof tenminutes, the tire pres- sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).

G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose is unscrewed.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla- tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.

324 Flat tire Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres- sure release button: next to pressure gauge;.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Tire sealantmay escapewhen the filler hose is unscrewed.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla- tion compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work- shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

12 V battery important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys- tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop

immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP, see (Y page 65) and (Y page 70). All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- ion battery:

G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-start- ing. Always make sure that neither you nor the bat- tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam- ple: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the car- pet or other synthetic materials Rif you rub the battery with a cloth

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produ- ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into con- tact with vehicle parts. RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat- tery. RIt is important that you observe the descri- bed order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.

Battery (vehicle) 325

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and dis- connecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.

All vehicles:

H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used bat- teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Mainte- nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12- volt battery yourself, please observe the fol- lowing: RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. RSwitch off the ignition. RDisconnect the negative terminal first and then the positive terminal.

The transmission is locked in positionj after disconnecting the battery. After the work has been done, install the bat- tery and replace the cover of the positive ter- minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro- tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the bat- tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corro- sive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and face- guard. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Con- tact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident.

326 Battery (vehicle) Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be suffi- ciently charged. Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special- ist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power.

Charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:

! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.4 V.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- ion battery:

! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batter- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- tion.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- tures below freezing point. When jump-start- ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

All vehicles:

! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 328). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 328).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi- cles and tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- ion battery: if the warning and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis- charged battery has frozen. In this case youmay neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a quali- fied specialist workshop. Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at low temperatures, do not charge a batterywhich has been removed using a battery charger. Allow the battery to warm up gently first, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and the starting characteristics impaired, especially at low temperatures.

Battery (vehicle) 327

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com- partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery:

G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven- tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up on the instrument cluster when temperatures are low, it is probably because the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles:

! Vehicleswith agasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

328 Jump-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump- start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RAll vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. RJump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: RThe jumper cables are not damaged. RBare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with othermetal parts while the jumper cables are connected to the battery. RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that canmovewhen the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to positionu in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 132).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.

Jump-starting 329

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

X Slide coverA of positive terminal: in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal: on your vehicle to positive terminal; of donor batteryB using the jumper cable, Always begin with positive terminal: on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal= of donor batteryC to ground point? of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point? and negative terminal=, then from pos- itive clamp: and positive terminal;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close coverA of positive terminal: after removing jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running. Rthe brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rthe towing eye could detach itself Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- over.

There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the per- missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- tification plate (Y page 363).

! When Active Brake Assist, Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or theHOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit- uations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash

! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes, or the trailer tow hitch, if availa- ble. You could otherwise damage the vehicle.

330 Towing and tow-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

! Do not use the trailer tow hitch for recovery or towing. Do not use the towing eye for recovery. this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.

! Shift the automatic transmission to position i and do not open the driver's or front pas- senger's door during towing. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position j, which could damage the transmission.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.

It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position i when the vehicle is being towed. If the auto- matic transmission cannot be shifted to position i, have the vehicle transported on a trans- porter or trailer. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to positioni

Disarm the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 84). You could other- wise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There is a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular care when removing the rear cover.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

All other vehicles The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and at the front, under covers:.

Towing and tow-starting 331

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

X Remove the towing eye from the retainer (Y page 320).

X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use a suitable object, e.g. a screwdriver, to pry off cover: on the front bumper from underneath. Take the cover from the opening, but do not remove it. Press the mark on cover: on the rear bumper inward and remove.

X All other vehicles: press the mark on cover: inward and remove.

X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it.

Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch do not have a bracket for the screw-in towing eye at the back. Connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch (Y page 204).

Removing the towing eye X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Attach cover: to the bumper and press until it engages.

Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground The automatic transmission automatically shifts to positionj when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. It is essential to observe the following steps to ensure that the automatic transmission remains in positioni during towing. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position i.

X Leave the SmartKey in position2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 113).

In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps

for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again.

Transporting the vehicle

General notes

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axlesmust be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged.

! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni- tion lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to position i.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to position j.

X Turn the SmartKey to positionu in the igni- tion lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

332 Towing and tow-starting Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission.

Vehicleswith 4MATICmay either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical sys- tem: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmissionwill be locked in positionP. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 328). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam- age the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 328).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- age, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the cargo compartment (Y page 334).

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special- ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep- ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper- ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- nents on the circuit and their functions stop operating.

Before changing a fuse Observe the important safety notes (Y page 333) X Switch off the engine. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 133).

or X When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to positionu in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 132).

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 154).

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell RFuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side RFuse box under the cargo compartment floor on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel

Fuses 333

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Dashboard fuse box The fuse box is under a cover on the side of the dashboard. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot- well

X Open the front-passenger door. X To open: fold cover: out towards the rear and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: at the rear. X Fold cover: forwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set inmotion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

X Open the hood (Y page 306). X To open: turn fasteners; on cover: coun- ter-clockwise as far as they will go.

X Remove fuse box cover: up.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box.

X Loosen screws=, fold up fuse box lid? and remove it.

X To close: check whether the seal is posi- tioned correctly in lid?.

X Insert lid? into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.

X Fold down lid? of the fuse box and tighten screws=.

X Insert cover: and turn fasteners; clock- wise as far as they will go.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the cargo compartment

334 Fuses Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Opening X Open the tailgate. X Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards (Y page 288).

X Release the Velcro fastener and lift up cover: in the cavity trim of the cargo com- partment in the direction of the arrow.

Closing X Fold back cover: in the opposite direction to the arrow and close the Velcro fastener.

Make sure that cover: is in the recess of the cavity trim provided for it.

i The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse allocation chart.

Fuses 335

Br ea kd ow

n as si st an ce

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel

G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warn- ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor- rectly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- shop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations

Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 360). You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 346) Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 339) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 339)

Operation

Information on driving Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull- ing to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving

336 Operation W he el s an d tir es

off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures in the tires Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 337). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- sure as necessary (Y page 339). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style RTire pressure RDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- ditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: in (3 mm) RM+S tires: in (4 mm)

For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approx- imately in (1.6mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a differ- ent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 321). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). The new tires only reach their full performance after this dis- tance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

Operation 337

W he el s an d tir es

Z

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi- cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- tion with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes- Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 321). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notes Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 356).

Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 (+7), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing thei snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specif- ically for driving in snow. UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteris- tics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted the M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 342). X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres- sure loss warning system (Y page 343).

X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 345).

Snow chains

G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

338 Winter operation W he el s an d tir es

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Observe the infor- mation regarding permitted wheel/tire com- binations (Y page 360). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 31 mph (50 km/h). ROn vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL, you must only drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been installed (Y page 173). RWhen snow chains are installed, never use Active Parking Assist (Y page 178).

You may wish to deactivate ESP when pulling away with snow chains installed: RAll vehicles (except MercedesAMG vehicles) (Y page 70) RMercedesAMG vehicles (Y page 71) You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driv- ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer- ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires includ- ing the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least Rif the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi- cle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear axle is the maximum tire pressure value stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap. Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure 339

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 346). The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- ditions. If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol- lowing tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num- bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 351). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud- den loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

340 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres- sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- sures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 (10 ), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is

too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap (Y page 149)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can over- heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg- ular wear, which can severely impair the brak- ing properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel.

Tire pressure 341

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recom- mended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 339).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- cific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 339). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 149) Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 339).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system

General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pres- sure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognize the tire pressure losswarning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 343).

Important safety notes The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 339). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the

342 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

same time cannot be detected by the tire pres- sure loss warning system. The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (corner- ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi- cle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- ing system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure Rchanged the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 339).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X Press on the steering wheel to call up the menu list.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press9 or: to select Tire Pressure. X Pressa to confirm. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press'OK' to Restart message is shown in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press thea button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown on the multifunction display.

X Press9 or: to select Yes. X Pressa to confirm. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted mes- sage is shown on the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pres- sures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the% button. or X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, press9 or: to select Cancel.

X Pressa to confirm. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi- cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon- itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Servicemenu of themultifunction display; see illustration (example).

Tire pressure 343

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Information on the message display can be found in the "Checking the tire pressure elec- tronically" section (Y page 345).

Important safety notes

G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres- sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- sure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequencewill be repeated every time the vehi- cle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- minated, the systemmay not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incom- patible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 339). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub- stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the taught-in reference values. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 345). The current pres- sures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 339). The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements.

344 Tire pressure W he el s an d tir es

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- functioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 250). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres- sure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the on- board computer may differ from those meas- ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmit- ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) thatmay be being operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni- cally X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 (Y page 132) in the ignition lock.

X Press on the steering wheel to call up the menu list.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press9 or: to select Tire Pressure. X Pressa to confirm. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure of each wheel.

If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the following message appears:Tire pressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutes. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon- itor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes- sages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessage appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" sec- tion (Y page 250). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres- sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur- rently set tire pressures as the reference values

Tire pressure 345

W he el s an d tir es

Z

for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new refer- ence values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also set reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen- ded for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side. You can find more tire pressures for various operating conditions in the tire pressure table inside the filler flap. Observe the information on tire pressure when doing so (Y page 339).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 132).

X Press on the steering wheel to call up the menu list.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel to select the Service menu.

X Confirm by pressinga on the steering wheel.

X Press9 or: to select Tire Pressure. X Pressa to confirm. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure of each wheel or the Tirepressure will be displayed afterdriving a few minutes message.

X Press the: button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message is shown on the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press thea button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes- sage is shown on the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pres- sures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the% button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres- sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXGG4 FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-GG4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occu- pants and themaximumpermissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B- pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden- tification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor- mation about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

346 Loading the vehicle W he el s an d tir es

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight: is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information plac- ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle- specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur- suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail- able amount of cargo and luggage load capa- city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

Loading the vehicle 347

W he el s an d tir es

Z

able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-

cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity cal- culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 346). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2 Rear: 3

Front: 1 Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu- pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of all occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

348 Loading the vehicle W he el s an d tir es

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load (maxi- mum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plate Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- fully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 346). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas- sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi- mumpermissible load that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu- pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance fac- tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corre- sponding quality grading markings on the side- wall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 RTraction grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat- utory safety requirements in addition to these grades.

All about wheels and tires 349

W he el s an d tir es

Z

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- cific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli- mate.

Traction

G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.

The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas- ured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road condi- tions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 337). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking dis- tance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro- priate care when driving.

Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 338).

Temperature

G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is estab- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

350 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 354)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 353)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 353) ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 342) A Manufacturer B Tire material (Y page 354) C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 351) D Load index (Y page 353) E Tire name The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- city and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the

tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

: Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code ? Rim diameter A Load bearing index B Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- tion (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufac- turing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man- ufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emer- gency. Tire width:tire width: shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcula- ted by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code:tire code= specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag- onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size

All about wheels and tires 351

W he el s an d tir es

Z

description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 346). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 353). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 353). Speed rating:speed ratingB specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the man- ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load- bearing indexA and speed ratingB. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the max- imum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" rep- resents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maxi- mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR",and the service specifica- tion must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi- cates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man- ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to theM+Smarking, winter tires also have thei snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require- ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa- tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi- cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

352 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than themaximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. You can find information on this under "Tires" (Y page 360). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist work- shop.

Load index

In addition to the load-bearing index, load index: may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this after the letter that identifies the speed rating (Y page 351). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on themaximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis- sible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 346).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- cific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man- ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety- relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica- tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? and manufacturing dateA. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol:marks that the tire complies with the

All about wheels and tires 353

W he el s an d tir es

Z

requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- portation. Manufacturer identification code: manufac- turer identification code; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 360). Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal- endar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked "3214" wasmanufactured in week 32 in 2014.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall: and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.

Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grad- ing assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. govern- ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard con- tains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi- mum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen- ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not.

Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

354 All about wheels and tires W he el s an d tir es

Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi- cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi- cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment

Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.

Curb weight Theweight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys- tem and optional equipment if these are instal- led in the vehicle, but does not include passen- gers or luggage.

Maximum load rating The maximum tire load is the maximum permis- sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.

Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an out- ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur- face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)

Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.

Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on thewheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim.

Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead.

All about wheels and tires 355

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per- formance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the pur- chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur- er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capa- city of a tire.

Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 321) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv- ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 321).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- dent. Rotate front and rear wheels only if thewheels and tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 357). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the tires according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's war- ranty book in your vehicle documents. If no war- ranty book is available, the tires should be rota- ted every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may be required earlier. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota- ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 343) or the tire pressure monitor (Y page 345).

Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro- planing. These advantages can only be gained if

356 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to positionj. X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Nor- mal" on vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL (Y page 173).

X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The vehicle electronics are now in key posi- tionu. This is the same as the key having been removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but- ton from the ignition lock (Y page 133).

X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 134).

X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 320). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards:. X Fold out lower plate;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate=.

X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago- nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack

Changing a wheel 357

W he el s an d tir es

Z

must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.

! Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you could damage the vehicle.

Observe the followingwhen raising the vehi- cle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe- cific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down- hill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll- ing away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RDo not place your hands or feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RNever open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). X Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-chang- ing tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are visible.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

358 Changing a wheel W he el s an d tir es

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until jack= sits completely on jacking point; and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn ratchet wrench? until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel ! Do not placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt andwheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com- pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel

bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 356). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea- sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align- ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger- tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- tight.

Changing a wheel 359

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.

X Place the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters AB are visi- ble.

X Turn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: toA). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire-change tool kit in the cargo compartment again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 339).

When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning systemor the tire pressuremonitor cannot func- tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys- tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors.

Wheel/tire combination

You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been spe- cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may other- wise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehi- cle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam- age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any quali- fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ- ous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.

The recommended pressures for various oper- ating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap

360 Wheel/tire combination W he el s an d tir es

Observe the notes on recommended tire pres- sures under various operating conditions (Y page 339). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment always equip the vehicle: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rwith the same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a differ- ent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 321).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Wheel/tire combination 361

W he el s an d tir es

Z

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incor- rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehi- cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Robserve the maximum permissible output in these wavebands. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields.

Approved antenna positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear fender Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi- tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos- est to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles "EMC guidelines for installa- tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting RF transmitters (radio frequency). Observe the legal require- ments for accessory parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wir- ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup- plement when installing. Deviations with respect to frequency bands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

362 Vehicle electronics Te ch ni ca ld at a

Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the fol- lowing values:

Frequency band Maximum transmission

output

Short wave 3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/ Tetra 380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis- sion output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi- mum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following fre- quency bands: RTrunked radio system/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi- cle identification number (VIN)

Location of vehicle identification plate (exam- ple, left-hand-drive vehicle)

X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

: Paint code ; VIN

Identification plates 363

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

Example: vehicle identification plate (Can- ada only)

: Paint code ; VIN

i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position.

X Fold floor covering; upwards. The VIN is visible:.

The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden- tification plate (Y page 363). The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 364).

Engine number

: Engine number (stamped into the crank- case)

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) = Emission control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Cali- fornian emissions standards

Service products and filling capaci- ties

Important safety notes

G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.

H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following: RFuels RExhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DEF RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant

364 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

Components and service products must match. Only use products recommended by Mercedes- Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. Products approved by Mercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Service Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indi- cate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- sion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.

G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- out delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- ing. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capacity

GLC 300 d 4MATIC 13.2 US gal (50.0 l)

All other models 17.4 US gal (66.0 l)

Model Of which reserve

All models Approx. 1.8 US gal (7.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

Service products and filling capacities 365

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam- age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.

! Do not use the following: RGasoline with more than 10% ethanol RE100 (100% ethanol) RGasoline with methanol RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform- ance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following pre- cautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre- mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuel quality on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff.

i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per- formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 149).

Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and preven- tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by

Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label.More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran- ded fuels that have additives. The fuel quality available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.

Diesel

Fuel grade G WARNING If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with gasoline. Nevermix gasoline with diesel fuel.

! Refuel only using diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN590or an equivalent specification. Fuel that does not conform to EN 590 can lead to increased wear and dam- age the engine and exhaust system.

! Do not use the following: Rmarine diesel Rheating oil Rbio-diesel Rvegetable oil Rgasoline Rparaffin Rkerosene Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and do not use any special additives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur.

! In countries outside the EU, only use low- sulfur Euro diesel with a sulfur content of under 50 ppm. Otherwise, the emission con- trol system could be damaged.

366 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

You will usually find information about the fuel quality on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the fuel pump, ask the gas station staff. Information on refueling (Y page 149).

Low outside temperatures i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow proper- ties is available during the winter months. Further information about fuel properties can be obtained from oil companies, e.g. at gas stations.

DEF

Important safety notes Comply with the important safety notes for ser- vice products when handling DEF (Y page 364). DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: Rnot poisonous Rcolorless and odorless Rnot flammable When you open the DEF container, small amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may experi- ence a burning sensation in your eyes, nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible. Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas.

Low outside temperatures DEF freezes at a temperature of approximately -11 . The vehicle is delivered from the factory equipped with a DEF preheating system. Winter operation can thus be guaranteed even at tem- peratures below -11 .

Additives ! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO 22241. Do not use additives with DEF and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment sys- tem.

Purity ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other service products, cleaning agents or dust) lead to: Rincreased emission values Rdamage to the catalytic converter Rengine damage Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system

Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly impor- tant with respect to avoidingmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during repair work, it must not be returned to the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaran- teed.

Filling capacities

Model Total capacity

All models 29.1 US qt (27.5 l)

Engine oil

General notes

! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter with specifications deviating from those expressly required for the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to set replacement intervals longer than those prescribed. This could otherwise cause damage to the engine or exhaust gas after- treatment. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil. This could

Service products and filling capacities 367

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

otherwise cause damage to the engine or exhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 364). The engine oils are matched to the performance ofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with main- tenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.

Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

All models 229.5, 229.6

Diesel engines MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval

All models 228.51, 229.31, 229.51, 229.52

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain- ers.

Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.

Model Capacity

GLC 300 d 4MATIC 6.3 US qt (6.0 l)

All other models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake

fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe the impor- tant safety notes on service products (Y page 364). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop in accordance with the replacement intervals and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- ponents in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add anti- freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser- vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail.

368 Service products and filling capacities Te ch ni ca ld at a

Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replace- ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser- vice products when handling coolant (Y page 364). The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol- lowing tasks: RAnti-corrosion protection RAntifreeze protection RRaising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 (-37 ), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 (130 ). The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 (-37 ). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 [-45 ]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte- nance interval at a qualified specialist work- shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

GLC 300 d 4MATIC 10.6 US qt (10.0 l)

Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC

12.2 US qt (11.5 l)

All other models 9.5 US qt (9.0 l)

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer con- centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam- age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other- wise, the level sensor may give a false reading. When handling washer fluid, observe the impor- tant safety notes on service products (Y page 364). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor- mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is fil- led with refrigerant R134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member.

Service products and filling capacities 369

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

! Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or replacing component parts, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli- cable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant Warning symbol: advises you about: RPossible dangers RHaving service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop

Filling capacities

All models

Refrigerant 22.2 0.4 oz (630 10 g)

PAG oil 2.8 oz (80 g)

Vehicle data

General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload.

Observe the information relating to level con- trol: RAIR BODY CONTROL (Y page 173)

Dimensions and weights

Model : Opening height

; Maximum headroom

Mercedes- AMG GLC 43 4MATIC

82.9 in (2106 mm)

75.6 in (1920 mm)

All other mod- els

84.5 in (2146 mm)

78.4 in (1992 mm)

Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC

Vehicle length 183.5 in (4661 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

82.5 in (2096 mm)

Vehicle height 64.1 in (1629 mm)

370 Vehicle data Te ch ni ca ld at a

Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2873 mm)

Turning circle 39.7 ft (12.10 m)

Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)

Maximum trunk load

All other models

Vehicle length 183.3 in (4656 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

82.5 in (2096 mm)

Vehicle height 65.5 in (1664 mm)

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2873 mm)

Turning circle 38.7 ft (11.80 m)

Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg)

Maximum trunk load

220 lb (100 kg)

Trailer tow hitch

Trailer loads

Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)

Model

All models 3501 lb (1588 kg)

Maximum drawbar noseweight ! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as pos- sible to the maximum permissible nose- weight. Do not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose. Note that the payload and the rear axle load are reduced by the actual payload.

Towing a trailer is not possible with all models. Further information (Y page 203). The drawbar load reduces the permissible over- all load and rear axle load.

The drawbar load acts from above onto the ball head on the trailer tow hitch. The trailer drawbar noseweight is not included in the towing weight.

Model Permissible nose- weight

All models 280 lbs (127 kg)

The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies. The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose- weight is the maximum weight with which the trailer drawbar can be loaded. The permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.

Gross rear axle weight rating when towing a trailer Missing values were not available at time of going to print.

Model Gross axle weight rating

GLC 300 d 4MATIC

Mercedes-AMG GLC 43 4MATIC

2822 lbs (1280 kg)

All other models 2755 lbs (1250 kg)

Ball position of the ball coupling

Trailer tow hitch 371

Te ch ni ca ld at a

Z

When the ball coupling is selected, the following dimensions must not be exceeded

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GLC Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz GLC 2017 Operator's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operator's Manual for Mercedes-Benz GLC as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operator's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz GLC. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz GLC 2017 Operator's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz GLC 2017 Operator's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz GLC 2017 Operator's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz GLC 2017 Operator's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz GLC 2017 Operator's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.